JP6712288B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine which can execute variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

In the conventional gaming machine, variable display can be executed in a specific variable display pattern based on the number of times of variable display reaching a preset number, and when the big hit game (advantageous state) ends, the big hit game There is one in which the number of times of variable display to be set differs depending on the type (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-115588 A

However, in Patent Document 1, after the variable display number reaches a preset number and the variable display is performed in the specific variable display pattern, the variable display is performed in the specific variable display pattern. Since the same value is set for the variable display counts up to, the timings at which the variable display according to the specific variable display pattern is executed are the same, that is, the game becomes monotonous and the interest is lowered.

The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest.

The gaming machine according to the hand stage 1,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-14);
Variable display means capable of executing variable display according to the determined variable display pattern (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 5),
A state that is different from the advantageous state and that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a time saving state) that is advantageous to the player after the end of the advantageous state , and that can be controlled to a non-specific state after the end of the specific state. State control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the big hit ending process shown in FIG. 9-17),
A first predetermined condition that is satisfied in the specific state depending on the number of times the variable display is executed in the specific state (for example, when "50" or "100" is set as the value of the cycle determination counter in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game) In addition, the variable display was executed 50 times or 100 times, or the variable display was executed 45 times or 95 times in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game, and the value of the cycle determination counter became "5". and it), the second predetermined condition is satisfied in non specific state by the number of executions of the variable display in the non-specific state (e.g., non with variably displayed 50 times and 100 times in the time reduction state after the jackpot game end is executed time reduction When "79" or "128" is set as the value of the cycle determination counter after the state has been entered, the variable display is executed 74 times or 123 times and the value of the cycle determination counter becomes "5". (the period determined notification that the value to be transmitted is set to "0" as a command)) and determinable condition determining means that one of the predetermined condition of including a plurality of predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, CPU 103 Is a portion for determining whether or not the value of the cycle determination value counter is 5 in the processing of 211SGS180 of the fluctuation pattern setting processing shown in FIG. 9-14),
Equipped with
The second predetermined condition includes a plurality of types of second predetermined conditions in which the number of executions of variable display in the non-specific state is different,
At least a part of the plurality of types of second predetermined conditions can be periodically satisfied,
The variable display pattern determining means, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible determine a particular variable display pattern (e.g., the cycle determination value CPU103 is in the process of 211SGS180 fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 9-14 Portion for determining the variation pattern as super reach loss PA2-2 by selecting the loss variation pattern determination table E in the processing of 211SGS182 after determining that the value of the use counter is 5),
Different types of the second predetermined condition can be satisfied according to the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied after the control to the specific state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-18, the value of the cycle determination value counter is The number of fluctuations until the fluctuation pattern is determined to be super reach loss PA2-2 (more accurately, the number of fluctuations until the value of the cycle judgment value counter becomes 0) becomes the cycle judgment until then. (The part that varies depending on the number of times the variation pattern is determined to be super reach loss PA2-2 due to the value counter value becoming 5) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in Rukoto Do allow different types of second predetermined condition is satisfied in accordance with the established number of predetermined conditions from being controlled to a specific state, variable display is performed by a particular variable display pattern Since the timing changes, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Gaming machine hand stage 2, a gaming machine according to the means 1,
Advantageous state control means (for example, CPU 103 special symbol stop processing of FIG. 9-16 that can be controlled to a plurality of types of advantageous states advantageous to the player (eg, big hit A big hit game state and big hit B big hit game state) 211SGS203 to 211SGS212 in the above) is further provided.
Depending on the type of the advantageous state, the type of the first predetermined condition after the end of the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-19, after the big hit game of the big hit A, all the variation display results are lost. If so, the 125th or 175th variation display after the jackpot game is executed in the variation pattern of super reach α loss, and after the jackpot B jackpot game, if all the variation display results are lost, (The part where the 174th or 224th fluctuation display after the big hit game is executed in the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss)) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the type of the first predetermined condition differs depending on the type of the advantageous state, it is possible to avoid monotonousness in the selection tendency of the specific variable display pattern, and to improve the interest.

Gaming machine Hand stage 3, a gaming machine according to the means 1 or means 2,
After the end of the advantageous state (for example, when the CPU 103 determines that the cycle determination counter is set in the process of 211SGS223 of the special symbol low process shown in FIG. 9-16), the specification corresponding to the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied A specific calculation means capable of executing a specific calculation using a value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of 211SGS224 to 211SGS228 of the special symbol low processing shown in FIG. 9-16),
It is possible to determine different types of the predetermined conditions as the predetermined conditions corresponding to the calculation result of the specific calculation,
There are a plurality of types of the specific value, and one of the types of the specific value is set corresponding to the control of the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process of 211SGS229 of the special symbol low process shown in FIG. 9-16). The value corresponding to the remaining loop count counter value based on the set scenario data)
The type of the specific value to be set differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-18, the numerical values that can be set after the big hit game of the big hit A is "50", "100", "79". , "128" are four, whereas the numbers that can be set after the big hit game of big hit B are three parts "50", "100", "128") ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by selecting different specific values depending on the type of advantageous state, it is possible to easily realize selection of different types of predetermined conditions.

Gaming machine Hand stage 4, a gaming machine according to any of the means 1 to means 3,
At least the condition determination means, the variable display pattern determination means and the variable display means, and game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
Production control means for controlling the production based on the control information received from the game control means (for example, the production control CPU 120 executes the production control process process shown in FIG. 7),
Further equipped with,
The variable display means can execute the variable display based on the start condition being satisfied after the start condition for executing the variable display is satisfied (for example, the CPU 103 performs the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 9-10). , A winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 9-11, a portion for executing the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-13),
The game control means can transmit specific information that can specify the number of remaining variable displays until the predetermined condition is satisfied as the control information when the start condition is satisfied (for example, the CPU 103 in FIG. Portion for setting transmission of the cycle determination value notification command in the processing of 211SGS136 or 211SGS137 of the random number value determination processing at the time of winning shown in -11) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to execute an effect based on the remaining number of variable displays until the predetermined condition is satisfied.

Gaming machine Hand stage 5 is a gaming machine according to the means 4,
The effect control means, based on the specific information, a plurality of variable displays before the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed, suggestive effect suggesting execution of the variable display by the specific variable display pattern. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of 211SGS345a and 211SGS345b in the prefetch notice setting processing shown in FIG. (A portion for displaying the hold display based on the memory in the display pattern α over multiple variable displays) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that variable display of a specific variable display pattern will be performed, and it is possible to improve interest.

Gaming machine Hand stage 6 is a gaming machine according to any of the means 1 to means 5,
The variable display pattern determining means can determine the specific variable display pattern even when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, but the remaining number of variable displays until the predetermined condition is satisfied is less than or equal to a predetermined number. Therefore, in the specific period before the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific variable display pattern is not determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 and 9-14, any one of 1 to 128 is set in the cycle determination counter). Is also not set, the value of the remaining loop number counter is 0, and the value set to the period determination counter is not 1 to 9, the variation pattern determination for the loss is performed in the variation pattern setting process. Even when the table A to the variation pattern determination table for loss is selected, the variation pattern of the super reach α loss (PA2-2) can be determined. However, as shown in FIG. 6 to 9, that is, before 1 to 4 fluctuations of the predetermined cycle fluctuation, if the fluctuation display result is a failure, the fluctuation pattern determination table F for a failure is selected to uniquely change the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1). -2) The part where is determined) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the target of the suggestive effect from becoming unclear and the interest of the suggestive effect from being lowered.

Gaming machine Hand stage 7, a gaming machine according to any of the means 1 to means 6,
The variable display pattern determining means does not determine the specific variable display pattern in response to the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition, and the specific variable in response to the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition. The display pattern is determined (for example, when the CPU 103 determines that the time saving flag is set in the processing of 211SGS181 of the variation pattern setting processing shown in FIG. 9-14, that is, the number of times the time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game. If the same number as “50” or “100” is set as the initial value of the cycle determination counter, the value of the cycle determination counter is 5 by selecting the variation pattern determination table for loss. When the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α loss is not uniquely determined in correspondence with the above, while "79" or "128" is set as the initial value in the cycle determination counter, the cycle determination is performed. If the value of the counter for use is 5, the variation pattern determination table for loss E is selected to uniquely determine the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α loss) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to set the predetermined variable display pattern only for the non-specific state while setting the predetermined condition commonly for both the specific state and the non-specific state. It is possible to easily realize the tendency of selecting the variable display pattern that matches the state.

The present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows a game information display part. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit classification in a special symbol display device. It is a figure showing the shift mode of the 1st reservation indicator and the 2nd reservation indicator. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit classification in a round indicator. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for loss. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a figure which shows the display mode of a display monitor, (C) is explanatory drawing of a display content. It is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) shows a display mode of the display monitor at the time of occurrence of an error in the set value or when the system is restored from the power interruption during the setting change. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display device during the setting change process, and (B) is a setting value error error, or The change of the display mode of the special symbol display device when returning from the power interruption during the setting change It is a figure which shows a part of timer interrupt process for game controls. It is the flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information memorize|stored in RAM and the state cleared. It is an explanatory view showing an initial symbol for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of starting a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control process treatment. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A, big hit B), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit C, big hit D), (C) is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the data holding area for game controls. (A) is a diagram showing a data holding area for effect control, (B) is a diagram showing a start winning award reception command buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a starting winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a random number determination process at the time of winning. 7 is a timing chart showing the contents of an output output cycle determination value notification command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern which can perform variation display. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing of scenario data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation aspect when each scenario data is set. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of background image update processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of pre-reading notice setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution determination ratio of a hold display notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution control period of a hold display notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display period of each background image. It is explanatory drawing in the case of not providing the restriction period of the pending display notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution mode of a hold display notice production. It is an explanatory view in the case where there is a hold memory in which the hold display notice effect can be executed and a hold memory in which the hold effect cannot be executed. It is an explanatory view in the case where there is a hold memory in which the hold display notice effect can be executed and a hold memory in which the hold effect cannot be executed. It is explanatory drawing in the case where the hold memory which can perform the hold display notice production and the hold memory which cannot be performed generate|occur|produce by electricity interruption. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus when scenario data A is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination aspect of the variation frequency of each period in a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, which are configured to include a plurality of LEDs, are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. The first pending storage number is displayed by, and the second pending display unit 25B displays the second pending storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are provided. Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. The universal figure game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending memories, which is the number of universal figure pending games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The general-university game based on the passage is held up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, the "big hit symbol" is reached and the big hit symbol is given. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing symbol".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain a large number of prize balls, or a big hit type that has few prize balls or almost no prize balls may be provided.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.) the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state is over, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure changing time (period during which the special figure is changed) is executed as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average figure change time (the period during which the figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game is improved compared to the normal state. The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the end conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of the times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting, etc.).

The normal state is a game state other than special states such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to be "small hit".

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (derived).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special drawing game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach-miss".) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach-miss"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) fixed decoration pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state the high-precision state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a production control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the universal figure hold display device 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (the game ball passes or the game ball passes from the various switches for detecting the game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23)). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is transmitted and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), the status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of turning on/off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. For these commands, the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power interruption has been performed or is being restored from the power interruption. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can regularly execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to execute the predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port are performed via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, whereby the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The execution of the general figure game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the general figure reservation display unit 25C is turned on to display the number of general figure reservations.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of holding memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. Further, the process of pre-reading the display result or the variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the look-ahead determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" when the big hit type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various determinations based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random number value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the stop display (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes the process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The processing during the big hit opening ends.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. Then, when the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or a certain change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during opening of the small hitting ends.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing is ended.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, the processing for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative display variable display (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect display processing during variable display ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command is not received without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to end the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hitting finish effect. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit midfield effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid production processing, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the production contents in the big hit gaming state, and executes various production controls in the big hit gaming state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-7, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board (gauge that constitutes a gaming board surface. Board 2 and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 207SG003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. In addition, in the gaming machine frame 207SG003, a glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window is provided between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface of the gaming machine frame 207SG003. The glass door frame 207SG003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. A player other than the store clerk can open the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and the glass. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, the left side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 207SG002L where the game balls can flow down, and the game board The right side of the image display device 5 in 2 is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where the game balls can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a relatively weakly launched (left hitting) game ball flows down by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30, and the right game area 207SG002R is a left game area 207SG002L by operation of the hit ball operation handle 30. The game ball that has been hit out more strongly (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down is a game area that flows down after passing through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5.

In addition, the general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R, the passage gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, the general A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can be won in the first start winning hole formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. The second start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 can be won, and the passage gate 41 can be passed.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot enter the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot enter the first starting winning opening. Is becoming

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-7, the main board 11 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is housed in the board case 207SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. The state is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable setting value state, and a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) and the like to be described later in the setting value change state. A setting switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value and an opening sensor 207SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Incidentally, as will be described later in detail, the setting value change state in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk or the like of a game hall can confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ) Is also.

The setting switching main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting switching switch 207SG052, is housed in the substrate case 207SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the locking switch 207SG051 and the setting switching switch 207SG052 Is exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. By using the game machine frame 207SG003 to open, it becomes possible to operate. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, so that only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation described later with a setting key. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be combined with one key.

Further, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged on the board case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged above the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged on the front surface of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is viewed. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. It is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, at a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of performing variable display of 1 special map, second special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of performing variable display of second special symbol, first hold display capable of displaying first reserved memory number 207SG025A, a second holding display 207SG025B capable of displaying the second number of reserved storages, a normal symbol display 207SG020 capable of executing a variable display of the ordinary symbols, a general figure holding display 207SG025C capable of displaying the number of ordinary figure holdings, In a gaming state in which a round indicator 207SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds of the big hitting game (big hitting type) during the big hitting game, a gaming ball such as a high base state (time saving state) or a big hitting game state is launched toward the right gaming area 207SG002R. A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided in which a right-handed hitting lamp 207SG132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 207SG133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and a time saving lamp 207SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time saving state) are collectively arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 8-3 and 8-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of 8 segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed with a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result in the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is a variable display result with two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derivation display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result in the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is a variable display with two types of big hit symbols (combination of illuminated LEDs) for each big hit type. Results and derivation display are possible.

In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is different from the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, although the big hit symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different. At least a part of the jackpot pattern that can be derived and displayed and the jackpot pattern that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be overlapped.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, each of the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B has LEDs of four segments arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, if the number of reserved memories is one, only the LED on the left end is turned on, and the second from the left each time the number of reserved memories increases, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left are sequentially turned on. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LEDs in the pending display corresponding to the variable display are shifted in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment) in accordance with the reduction (consumption) of the pending storage. In part 207SG, the light is turned off toward the left).

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending storage and the second special figure pending storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending storage is preferentially executed. It is like this. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-6, for example, when there is one first special figure reservation memory and two second special figure reservation memories (only the LED at the left end of the first reservation indicator 207SG025A). Is lit and the left two LEDs of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are lit), the second special figure hold memory is set to 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Then, the variable display based on the first special figure reservation storage is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the round indicator 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the big hit type in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, there are provided a total of three big hit types: a big hit A which is a 5 round big hit, a big hit B which is a 10 round big hit and a big hit C which is a 15 round big hit. However, which of the segments forming the round display 207SG131 is lit differs depending on the type of jackpot.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

The effect control board 12 in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 operable between the respective origin positions and the effect positions during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321, and the second movable body 207SG322 is located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. The origin detection sensor 207SG332 that can detect this is connected.

FIG. 8-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic unit 207SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-8(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals forming the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-8(A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in FIG. 8-8(B), for example, a determination result indicating whether the variable display result is “miss”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) ) Or different EXT data depending on the determination result (big hit type determination result) which one of a plurality of types is used for the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit”.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8(B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “miss”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit C” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result is “small hit”.

The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variable stop (determination) of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , The second game state designation command corresponding to the (time saving state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specification command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to identify which error (abnormality) has occurred on the production control board 12 side. Therefore, the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification processing described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") that designates the display of the effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening to notify that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the EXT data to be set may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of times the round is executed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, "1" to "15"). To be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designation command which notifies that the 1st starting condition for executing the special drawing game which uses the 1st special drawing in 1st special design indicator 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start opening winning a prize designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the second starting mouth winning designation command is transmitted, for example, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, the total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

Command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and activated (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the setting value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the setting value changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the operation for confirming the set value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the set value confirming state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the operation of confirming the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and a numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information are configured.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. The transmission operation of outputting various signals is also performed.

FIGS. 8-9 are explanatory diagrams illustrating random number values counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-9, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for determining the universal figure display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game controlling microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game controlling microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

Although the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which each of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-9, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random number values is used. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-10 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to the case where the variation display result is "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a variation display result of "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach α, normal reach β,... A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ,... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-10, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation time of the variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach β is executed In this case, the special figure change time is set longer than the change pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since the variation display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the jackpot expectation degree is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are classified into variation pattern types such as non-reach type, normal reach type, and super reach type. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern, only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination is provided, and these fluctuations are set. It is also possible to first determine the type of the variation pattern from the random number for determining the pattern type, and then determine the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-10, an example is shown in which the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, when the set value that is set is 1, the variation pattern that is the normal reach loss is set, and when the set value is 2, pseudo continuous production is performed. If the set value that is set as 3 is a variation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach-missing, then a pseudo-relational effect is executed three times and a variation pattern that becomes super-reach-missing...

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-13, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display of a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 is, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 8-11(A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 8-11(B), -11(C) display result determination table (setting value 3), FIG. 8-12(A) display result determination table (setting value 4), FIG. 8-12(B) display result determination table (setting value 4) Setting value 5), display result determination table (setting value 6) shown in FIG. 8-12(C), jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-13(A), FIG. 8-13( B) big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), big hit variation pattern determination table, small hit variation pattern determination table, lost variation pattern determination table, public figure display result determination table (not shown), universal figure A fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown) and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is changed. .. The set value is made up of 6 stages from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases in stages. In other words, the set value is the largest value of 6, which is the most unfavorable value to the amusement hall side, and the smaller the value becomes in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the more advantageous value to the amusement hall side. Become.

FIGS. 8-11(A) to 8-11(C) and FIGS. 8-12(A) to 8-12(C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 8-11(A) to FIG. 8-11(C) and FIG. 8-12(A) to FIG. 8-12(C), in each display result determination table, the game state is a probable state ( In the high accuracy state), more determination values are assigned to the special jackpot display result of the “big hit” than in the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. Then, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, and 1/260 when the setting value is 3, Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, 1/200 when the set value is 6, compared to the special figure display result as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state Then, the probability of being determined becomes higher (in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2 and 1/180 when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, 1/120 when the setting value is 5, and 1/100 when the setting value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability changing state (highly accurate state), it is determined that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as compared to the normal state and the time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

Further, in each display result determination table, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state and the set value. Has been. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-11(A) to FIG. 8-11(C) and FIG. 8-12(A) to FIG. 8-12(C), regardless of the game state and the set value, The probability that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" and the small hit game state is controlled is set to 1/200. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is set as “small hit” regardless of the set value and the small hit game state is controlled is the same probability. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining to control the small hitting game state as the small hitting result may be different according to the set value.

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the special map display result being "big hit" is the highest. The lower the value of the set value, the larger the value of the set value is assigned the judgment value so that the probability that the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and the big hit gaming state is determined to be high (big hit probability: set value 6>set value 5>set value 4>set value 3>set value 2>set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. 8-11(A) to 8-11(C) and FIG. 8-12. If any of the hit judgment values corresponding to the big hit shown in (A) to FIG. 8-12 (C) is matched, it is determined that the special design is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Also, MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit shown in FIGS. 8-11(A) to 8-11(C) and FIGS. 8-12(A) to 8-12(C). Then, it is decided to make a small hit for the special symbol. That is, the big win and the small win are determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8-11(A) to 8-11(C) and FIGS. 8-12(A) to 8-12(C) is a probability (ratio) of being a big hit and a small hit. The probability (ratio) of Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B stop symbols in It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, determining whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make a symbol a small hit symbol.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 causes the display results shown in FIGS. 8-11(A) to 8-11(C) and 8-12(A) to 8-12(C). It is designed to judge whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the judgment table.Whether a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately for each set value Whether or not to make a small hit may be individually determined.

In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6 that can be set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-13(A) and 8-13(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 8-13(A) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when doing. In addition, FIG. 8-13(B) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

The jackpot type determination table is, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. Is a table that is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 8-14. In the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as a big hit type, a big hit A (also called an uncertain variation big hit) that only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state and shifts to the low accuracy high base state, and the big hit game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time reduction control are executed, and a big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a probable variation big hit) are set so as to shift to the high-accuracy and high-base state.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to a first state that is advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "B" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big hit game state by "big hit C" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

The time saving control executed after the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment), or a special number of times of the predetermined number of times. Before the figure game is executed, the jackpot game state is entered and the game ends.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is big hit B or big hit C, high-precision control and time saving control are executed again after the big hit game state ends, so the big hit game state continues without going through the normal state. It occurs in the so-called condominium state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, an example in which three types of big hit A to big hit C are provided as the big hit type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is 2. You may provide less than four types or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-13(A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the determination value range of MR2 is from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “4”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “5”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the setting value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when the big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the first special symbol, only the time saving control is executed after the big hitting game is finished. Among the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability variation control and the big hit control are executed, the proportions for determining the big hit C become lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the highest payout rate is the case where the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the payout rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-13(B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the setting value is "4", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. (The jackpot B is not assigned a judgment value).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the second special symbol, only the time saving control is executed after the big hitting game is finished. Among the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability variation control and the probability change control are executed, the proportions for determining the big hit C become lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, if the variation special symbol is the second special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set value is 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B. It does not determine any of the big hit type (the determination ratio is 0%), because the determination ratio of the big hit type differs depending on the set value that is set. Although included, even when the variation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, there may be provided a case of determining the big hit type as big hit B. ..

In this way, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different according to the set value that is set, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. It has become.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the jackpot probability is increased, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game playability is not limited to this, and may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game property of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the probability of jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. While the gaming state after the big hit game is finished is controlled to a probable state on the basis of passing, the game property (so-called V that the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the variation special map). If the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time saving control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type/2 types mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game characteristics are the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the small hit probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed to a probable state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot gaming state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is predetermined that the variation display result is "big hit", and the variation display result is "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table that is used when it is determined in advance and the variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “miss” are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation patterns of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) are included. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 8-15(A) and 8-15(B), as the big hit variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table (big hit A is used when the big hit type is big hit A. And a big hit variation pattern judgment table (big hit B, big hit C) used when the big hit types are big hit B and big hit C, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (big hit) A) and the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C) show fluctuation patterns for normal reach big hits (PB1-1), fluctuation patterns for super reach α big hits (PB1-2), and super reach β big hits. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in FIG. 8-15(A), in the big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, one of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 is 1 Up to 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are super reach. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the β big hit. When the set value is “2”, 1 to 380 of the range of the judgment value of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 381 to 835. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super-reach α big hit, and 836 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super-reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 360 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 361 to 820. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super-reach α big hit, and 821 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super-reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “4”, 1 to 340 of the range of MR3 determination values of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 341 to 805. Are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", 1 to 320 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 321 to 790. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 791 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 300 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 301 to 775. Are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 8-15(B), in the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B, big hit C), when the set value is “1”, the judgment value range of MR3 is from 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. Further, when the set value is "2", 1 to 180 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "3", of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 160 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 161 to 470 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Further, when the setting value is "4", from the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are set. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and 431 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns (PB1-3) of super-reach β big hits. When the set value is “5”, 1 to 120 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 121 to 390 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of super-reach α jackpot, and 391 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super-reach β jackpot (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 101 to 350 are set. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit are assigned, and the variation patterns 351 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

In this way, when the big hit A is won in the special drawing game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. And the set values become lower in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when the big hit B or the big hit C is won in the special drawing game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the determination value is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super-reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super-reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super-reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. You can increase your expectations.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is a determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-15(C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any of 1 to 6, the determination value range of MR3 is 0 to 997. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Although only the PC 1-1 is provided as the variation pattern for small hits in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern for small hits. With the set values 1 to 6, the variation pattern of small hits may be determined from a plurality of variation patterns at different rates.

In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of pending storage is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to time saving control, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total pending storage number is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when the game state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of β-miss (PA2-3) within the range of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 8-16(A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low base medium total pending storage number), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the setting value is “2”, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 431 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “3”, out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the setting value is “4”, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, and 391 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the setting value is “5”, 1 to 370 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 350 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to a total pending storage number of 2 to 4, a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), a super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of the α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. ing.

As shown in FIG. 8-16(B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for the number of low-base medium total pending storage numbers 2 to 4), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal-reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the change pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the change pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 480 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 481 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 460 of the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 461 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is "4", 1 to 440 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “5”, 1 to 420 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 401 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total pending storage number of 5 to 8, a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach. A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of the α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. ing.

As shown in FIG. 8-16(C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more low base medium total pending storage numbers), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is In the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach-loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “2”, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3) in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 531 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “3”, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3) in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 511 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, 1 to 490 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “5”, 1 to 470 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 471 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 450 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss ( PA2-2), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the super-reach β loss, which is a range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 8-10(D), in the variation pattern determination table for loss D (for high base), when the setting value is “1”, among the determination value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. The variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) is assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 530 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4) out of the range of 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 511 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).
When the set value is “4”, 1 to 490 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are allocated to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “5”, 1 to 470 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “6”, 1 to 450 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

As described above, when the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D are used, the rate of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than the rate of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the rate of determining the normal reach variation pattern. Are set to be lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. When using the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values are variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 of the determination values are the super reach β loss. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by the common determination rate regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the production effect from being deteriorated due to the fact that the variable display due to is not executed.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach β loss are completely the same between the set values as variation patterns for loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the determination rate of the variation pattern of these super-reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach β loss is between each set value. May differ by a slight difference (for example, about 1%).

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value that has been set, but is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value that is set. Alternatively, only the determination rate of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. Although the example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is lost, the super reach α The determination rate of only one of the loss variation pattern determination rate and the super reach β loss variation pattern determination rate may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. Although the example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value that is set, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value that is set.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach is different depending on the set value that has been set. Depending on the set value that has been set, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation patterns and the normal reach variation patterns. That is, when the variation pattern determination rate differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine by the ratio of.

The variation time of the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach-loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach-loss variation is less than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIGS. 8-10). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach-miss variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, and the pending storages are easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4. Occasionally, by making a start winning, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start winning that is not held, and when the number of holding memories decreases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without a long shortening of the fluctuation time ( Since PA1-1) is determined, the time for variable display is lengthened, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that variable display is not executed.

Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-16(A) to 8-16(C), fluctuations are made by using different fluctuation pattern determination tables for loss according to the total number of pending storages. Although the mode for deciding the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending storage in the special symbol to be changed (for example, the first when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed). The number of special symbols pending storage, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation pattern may be determined by using a different variation pattern determination table for loss depending on the number of pending storage numbers of the second special symbol).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any value of 1 to 6, the variation pattern of the super reach loss. The ranges of random number values assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability are different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation display is actually performed in the variation pattern of the super-reach loss (variation pattern of the super-reach loss). The appearance rate of) varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the variation display is performed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the example is different. The present invention is not limited to this. Considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display shows the variation of the super reach loss at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed in a pattern.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). It In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

In such a RAM 102, a game control data holding area (not shown) is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a general figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It is provided with a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The 1st special figure reservation storage section, the game ball passes (enters) the 1st starting winning a prize mouth which the winning a prize ball device 6A forms, the starting winning a prize (the 1st starting winning a prize) occurs, but the special drawing which is not started yet Hold data of the game (special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the 1st special figure reservation storage section associates with the reservation number in the winning order (detection order of the game ball) to the first start winning port, and establishes the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Based on the above, the CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, and the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like, as reserved data, It is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The pending data thus stored in the first special figure pending storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is pending, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display result ), it becomes the hold information that enables the determination as to whether or not a big hit will occur.

The second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred, but has not been started yet. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning number into the second starting winning opening (detection order of gaming balls) with the holding number, and establishes the second starting condition in passing (entry) of the gaming ball. Based on the above, the CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, and the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like, as reserved data, It is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the second special figure pending storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is pending, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display result ), it becomes the hold information that enables the determination as to whether or not a big hit will occur.

The holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entry) through the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passing (entry) through the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning due to this may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, starting port data indicating which of the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the holding information and may be stored in association with the holding number. ..

The ordinary figure reservation storage unit stores the retained information of the ordinary figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the public figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate, and is used for determining the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 and the like are stored as pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical value data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and are periodically set according to execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 on the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-17A, the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. Each of the first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw a letter "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display portion 207SG029A to the fifth display portion 207SG29E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the non-test area in the entire area of the ROM 101 or the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

On the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-17(B) and 8-17(C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low accurate low base state) for every out 6000 balls in the full game state. Base L that is (real-time value during measurement), base 1 that is the base value calculated in the normal state (low accurate low base state) for each first out 6000 balls in all game states, and in all game states Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low accuracy low base state) for every 2nd out 6000 balls, and the normal state for every 3rd out 6000 balls (low accuracy low base state) in all game states Base 3, which is the base value calculated in step 3, can be displayed. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 in percentage.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 207SG029, in order to display "bL." which is an abbreviation for the base L, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “1.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b1.” of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Further, when the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “2.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b2.” of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “3.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b3.” of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

In the display monitor 207SG029 of the present embodiment, control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-19, the main board 11 executes control for switching the display on the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The display color of each base value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-18, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1”, each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. When the set value set to "5" is displayed, each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", the display monitor is displayed. Each base value in 207SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, a clerk or the like in the game arcade can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 207SG029, without the CPU 103 executing the set value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. 8-20 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (207SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017 and the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

When the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and when the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process to be described later was being executed before the power failure (power failure occurred during execution of the setting value changing process). It is determined whether or not (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is executed. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear processing for clearing the RAM 102 is executed (207SGSa009), the RAM clear flag is set again, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 without executing 207SGSa009 and 207SGSa010.

In 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the lock switch 207SG051 being ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 being opened (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not (207SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the set value change processing (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014, and the RAM clear flag. If is not set (207SGSa013a; N), a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014.

If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011;N) or the open sensor is OFF (207SGSa012;N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa014 without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

In 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated this time (whether or not the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed) ( 207SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and if the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the power supply to the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Recovery processing for returning to the state (207SGSa015) is performed.

In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, and sends a command for restoration including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

Further, in 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) or the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or the normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened, and the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on while operating the clear switch while playing the pachinko game When the machine 1 is activated), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the processes of 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 described above are executed.

When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

In addition, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a command at the time of restoration including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start (207SGSa022). Then, the cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGSa023), and as shown in FIG. 8-26(A), all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are set. Notification of cold start is started by starting blinking (207SGSa024).

After the execution of 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (207SGSa026; N), the processing of 207SGSa025 and 207SGGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 207SG029. Ends blinking (207SGSa027), and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least some of the segments forming the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to take a timer interrupt at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (207SGSa029), and interrupts are enabled (207SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can regularly execute timer interrupt processing.

Further, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 tells the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), recovery from power failure during setting change described later, and the like. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormal setting value is transmitted (207SGSa031). Further, the error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processes of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 are repeatedly executed. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B included in the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notifications (error notifications) of occurrence of a set value error and recovery from power interruption during setting change (error notification). , “E.” is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27(B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer in a game arcade via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the above, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk in the game hall, etc.), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. , The first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B to execute the error notification.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment displays the display monitor 207SG029, the first when the abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored while the set value is being changed. Since the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are executed to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk at the amusement hall, etc. generates an error from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and sets the set value. It is possible to recognize that the power was cut off during the change. In addition, since the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power interruption while changing the set value can be recognized by the gaming machine management device, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. Has become.

In the game control main processing of the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or while the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the mode in which the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed after the flag is cleared is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing is performed. Determines that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or not after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but determines that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014 ; Y) may be performed.

FIG. 8-21(A) is a flowchart showing the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface processing. In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) in the designated address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (207SGSa043). When the designated address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is designated (207SGSa044), and the designated address is the address (F002) storing the RAM clear flag. It is determined whether or not (207SGSa45).

If the specified address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), the flow proceeds to 207SGSa042, and if the specified address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), the Address is designated and the process proceeds to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). When the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clearing process ends.

In the RAM 102 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area, as shown in FIG. Of these storage areas, a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and a second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 will be described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, a RAM clear flag is stored at the third address (F002). At other addresses (F003 and later), special figure holding storage, general figure holding storage, various counter values, various timers, various flags, and game information including error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored. . The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. A value (for example, a set value “0”) indicating the factory shipping state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. Incidentally, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where the value indicating the factory shipment state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be changed. You may urge to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change processing by the display on the display device 5 or the like.

That is, the RAM clearing process in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment is a process of clearing the data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in the address excluding the set value.

Note that the characteristic unit 207SG in the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clear processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, only the game information stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment) may be cleared.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the form in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is set in the game control microcomputer. By storing in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing and reading the RAM clear flare in the RAM 102 is omitted, The processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. Incidentally, when the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 8-22 is a flowchart showing the setting value change processing (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value change processing, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments forming the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B start blinking (207SGSa052, see FIG. 8-27(A)). Further, the CPU 103 selects only one of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode (a mode that is neither the big hit A, the big hit B, nor the big hit C shown in FIG. 8-6) according to the setting value changing process. Is turned on (207SGSa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any value 1 to 6 is stored as the setting value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the set value is set in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Is set to "1" (setting value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any of 1^& is stored as the set value in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056). When the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056; Y). Executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa057).

After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer in a game arcade (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061) and determines whether or not the setting switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). When the setting switch 207SG052 is not operated (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065, and when the setting switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062; Y), the address F001 of the RAM 102 is set based on the operation of the setting switch 207SG052. The contents are updated (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", the setting value "2" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "1" is set as the temporary setting value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the setting value "3" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "2" is provisionally set. A numerical value that is one larger than the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as the setting value, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as the borrowing setting. If the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new provisional set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 or the address stored in the address F001. The set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the setting value (or temporary setting value) on the display monitor 207SG029. Ends (207SGSa067), and turns off all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa067a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether a temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). When the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and when the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; Y), further in the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the value of the setting value stored in the address F000 is different from the value of the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070).

When the value of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the value of the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 are the same (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072 and is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. If the value of the set value stored in the address F001 is different from the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is stored in the address F000. Store (207SGSa071), and proceed to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual setting value.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the setting value change processing.

FIG. 8-23 is a flowchart showing the set value confirmation processing (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The blinking of the 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B is started (207SGSa102, see FIG. 8-27(A)). Further, the CPU 103 selects only one of the segments forming the round display 207SG131 as a mode (a mode that is neither the big hit A, the big hit B, nor the big hit C shown in FIG. 8-6) according to the set value confirmation process. Is turned on (207SGSa103).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power cut detection process execution start timer has timed out (207SGSa107). If the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 are repeatedly executed, and the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa107; Y). Executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa108). The power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value changing process described above.

After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109) and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to the management device such as the management computer of the game arcade (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the processing of 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111;N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are also displayed. All the segments that make up are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the setting value confirmation processing.

Thus, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the round display device 207SG131, and the first hold display device 207SG025A, the second By starting blinking of the hold indicator 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232, the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like can change the set value or the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that confirmation is in progress.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, at the start of the set value change processing and the set value confirmation processing, among the segments configuring the round indicator 207SG131, as a mode corresponding to the set value change processing and the set value confirmation processing. Although the mode in which only one LED is turned on is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting patterns of the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 are jackpot A and jackpot shown in FIG. 8-6. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it does not correspond to either B or big hit C.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-27(A), at the start of the set value change processing or the set value confirmation processing, a mode corresponding to the set value change processing or the set value confirmation processing is executed. As an example, an example is shown in which the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 are lit in the same manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 can change the set value. The lights may be turned on in different manners at the start of the process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is opened with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open. By turning ON the clear switch and the clear switch, the setting value changing process is executed.

At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-25(A) to 8-25(E), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit are turned off by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (the display of the base value shown in FIG. 8-17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display copies when the setting value changing process is executed at the time of startup and when the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated while the set value is being displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D as described above, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off (powered off) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on while the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. When the clear switch is turned off, the set value confirmation process is executed.

At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. 8-25(A), FIG. 8-25(B) and FIG. 8-25(E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (the display of the base value shown in FIG. 8-17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display copies depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes ready for a game.

FIG. 8-24 is a flowchart showing the power failure detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation processing, first, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less (207SGS081). If the power-off signal is not input (207SGS081; N), the process is terminated, and if the power-off signal is input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the setting value information stored in the RAM 122 is specified. Then (207SGS082), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, after creating the check data used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process shifts to a loop process in which neither process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

Incidentally, in the game control timer interrupt process in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. After that, S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed.

Next, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 8-29 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and the CTC (counter/timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Circuit) register setting.

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by 1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405; N), the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 are repeatedly executed, and waits until the command reception waiting timer times out.

When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored to the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player information in the player information input process described later After the input of information is accepted, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

When the hot start notification command is not received (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (207SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information and the performance information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 122 since the last time the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started, the number of big hits, (207 SGS 409) while clearing the information including the number of times of super-reach, etc., and notifying that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared and that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. A RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the image on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-33(A), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 on the image display device 5 are cleared. A notification image 207SG005M1) for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) of displaying the game effect lamp 9, emitting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. It is only necessary to notify that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

If the cold start notification command is not received (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state, the setting value is changed. A set value related notification process for executing notification of being in operation (notification of setting value change) and notification of setting value confirmation (setting value confirmation notification) is executed (207SGS412).

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. , The notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the setting variable is being changed and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state. In general, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open, and the clerk at the amusement hall who changes or confirms the set value visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. It is in the state of doing. In other words, the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk of the game hall or the like who changes or confirms the set value. It is considered that the clerk of the game hall cannot judge from the display of the image display device 5 whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Therefore, as the notification of the change of the set value and the notification of the set value being confirmed, the pachinko game machine can be used by a clerk of the game hall to change or check the set value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the emission of the game effect lamp 9. You may notify that 1 is starting in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state.

Returning to FIG. 8-29, the effect control CPU 120 further determines whether or not a set value change end notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416). When the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are not received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; Y). Proceeds to 207 SGS427.

If the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command have not been received by the 207SGS 411 (207SGS 411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error specification command has been received (207SGS 425). . When the error designation command is received (207SGS425; Y), the error notification processing (207SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error designation command is executed, and when the error designation command is not received (207SGS425; N), , 207 SGS403.

As the error notification in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-33(D), if the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command is displayed on the image display device 5, Good.

As described above, in the effect control main processing in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start, the player information (the player information While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc., from the RAM 122, the production information (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. since the last start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) is cleared. ) And set value information (any one of the values "1" to "6" corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the set value changing state or the setting confirming state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is already stored in the RAM 122. The existing set value information is overwritten (updated).

That is, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a set value confirmation state, or a set value change state. There is.

Then, in 207 SGS 427, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, and the image display device 5 receives the notification. The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the command is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-31, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, a new set value is set for the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is not set, the display of the decorative design is started on the image display device 5 as the initial design with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left. Further, if the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5 " The display of the decorative pattern is started by the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

In the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "5" from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5. ,” and “6” are combined to start displaying the decorative pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example, “6”) advantageous to the player is set. When set, a decorative value is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as an initial design at a higher rate than when a setting value that is unfavorable to the player (for example, "1") is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a setting value that is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "5" from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5. ”, “6” are combined to start displaying the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (eg, “6”) advantageous to the player is set. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or the set value that is unfavorable to the player (for example, “1”) is set. In addition, the speaker 8L, 8R is used depending on whether a setting value that is advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set or a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player is set (for example, "1"). The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

Then, returning to FIG. 8-29, the CPU 120 for effect control sets “4” to the read-ahead restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the read-ahead notice effect in the first four fluctuations (207SGS428). After that, the CPU 120 for effect control shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (ON), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processing.

First, the effect control CPU 120 executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (207SGS431). In the activation notification processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is specified which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, The boot notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the boot notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start notification process timer is started, the start notification process is executed at the next and subsequent interrupts to start the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table. Notification may be performed.

In the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value check end notification command. Depending on whether there is any, the mode of activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-32, when a hot start notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, that is, a new pachinko gaming machine 1 is received. If the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the output sound A for 30 seconds. Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same as the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

When a cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound B is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same as the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R, the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or a setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R for 30 seconds. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the CPU 120 for effect control emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs the sound for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R. It includes both performing the output of B.

Further, when the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R for 20 seconds. The output sound C is output, and the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value change is completed). Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L, 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same, The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L, 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when a set value change end notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a hot start notification command or a cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Unlike the above, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a gaming machine management computer or each counter, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As a start notification when the above, a signal that can specify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, and a setting confirmation state, a device for executing the start notification is common. Although there is illustrated a mode (in both cases, light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed), the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether the start is started in the start, the cold start, the setting change state, or the setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the cold start, the image display device 5 is displayed). The message image is displayed at, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, a signal may be output from the aforementioned external output terminal to the management device).

Also, the notification mode in each device that executes the startup notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are illuminated, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state. In this case, only some of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is in the opened state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (for the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some speakers.) When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, while displaying a message image indicating that the setting is being changed such as “setting changing” on the image display device 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started up at the start, a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or RAM 122 has been cleared, such as “RAM has been cleared”, may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of external output terminals described above, the terminals for outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, as a setting value change notification, a period until the setting value change ends (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received). A signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period) to the management apparatus, and after the setting value change is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management apparatus as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management device as a RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is commonly used in each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

As described above, in the boot notification process, the boot notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different depending on the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The startup notification of may be executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as being executed when any of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this, and of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives the command. You may provide the command which does not perform start notification.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, as the initialization effect in the present invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. The form in which different combinations of decorative patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the command received when the is activated is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the initialization effect, The mode of the start notification and the combination of the decorative patterns may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or only a part thereof may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, in any of the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start, is activated by cold start, is activated in the setting change state, and is activated in the setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are given. May not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 8-29, the CPU 120 for effect control then executes power-off detection processing (207SGS432). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIG. 8-34, the effect control CPU 120 first receives an input of a power-off signal from a power supply board (not shown) indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not (207SGS441). When the power-off signal is not input (207SGS441; N), the processing is ended, and when the power-off signal is input (207SGS441; Y), the setting value information and the player information stored in the RAM 122 are displayed. The included backup data is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating the check data used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the process shifts to a loop process in which neither process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

Returning to FIG. 8-29, next, the CPU 120 for effect control analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command and the like (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 8-8) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (207SGS434). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Next, a production random number updating process (207SGS435) for updating the count value of the counter for generating a production random number such as a jackpot pattern determination random number, a player information input process (207SGS436) for receiving an input of player information, and a game. A player information output process (207SGS437) for outputting player information and a performance information totaling process (207SGS438) for totaling performance information are executed. Then, it transfers to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 operates the player's stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to generate a password (a password generated in an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance). The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receives the input of the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc., as the player information stored every time the variable display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output processing, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player, and the two-dimensional code is generated. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone and transmits the player information collected in the current game to an external server, so that the pachinko game machine is played. The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time variation display, big hit game, and super reach are executed. To do.

Next, an effect control process process in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-35, in the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prefetching restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451). When the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), after performing the read-ahead notice setting process (S161), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) depending on the effect control process flag. Execute the process.

In addition, when the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is any of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is either "0" or "2" to "7" (207SGS452; N), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. When the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (207SGS452; Y), the value of the prefetch regulation counter is decremented by −1 (207SGS453), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177) according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7). By executing the processing of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the activation, execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

In the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and thus the variable display is performed four times. Although the form of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 starts the winning a prize determination process (FIG. The execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays by not executing (see 5).

As described above, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ready to play, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted over four variable displays. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game based on the fact that the game becomes possible based on the fact that the game is possible. The light amount of the effect lamp 9, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, and the like may be set in the factory-shipped state.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-2(H), the effect control CPU 120 has the reach effect of the super reach A or super reach B as the first suggestive effect, It is possible to execute the reach effect of Super Reach C or Super Reach D as the second suggestion effect, and at the time of executing the reach effect of Super Reach C or Super Reach D, the super reach C or Super Reach D is executed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or the super reach D is notified from the start of the reach effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, the present embodiment also includes Invention 207SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, the fact that the setting state is set is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, so that it is not possible to appropriately notify the setting state. There was a problem. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 207SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process moves to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22),
When it is in the setting state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state is displayed on the information display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27(A), the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process). If it is, the part that lights up all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, since it is informed that the setting state is set in the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is notified, this feature is preferable. Notification can be made.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
Set by the setting means when the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch is OFF, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON). Shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value can be confirmed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 8-23),
When in the confirmation state, the information display unit displays a display that can be recognized as being in the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27(A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process). If it is, the part that lights up all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, since it is informed that it is in the confirmation state in the information display section where the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is notified, this feature is preferable. Notification can be made.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 3 of invention 207SG,
The display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display section during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 and 8-27). In, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derivatively display the variable display result, and the display mode when the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, Different parts)
A game machine characterized by that is described, and according to this feature, it can be accurately recognized that it is in a setting state or a confirmation state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 4 of invention 207SG,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed on the variable display section (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display). (A part that lights up all the segments that make up the device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to perform suitable notification on the variable display section.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 5 of invention 207SG,
The variable display section is configured by a plurality of small display sections that can be independently turned on (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each configured by eight segments. Part),
As a display capable of recognizing that it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, all the small display sections are displayed in a lighting state (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (The part that lights up all the constituent segments)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the game machine is in the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine described in Means 6 of Invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that shoots a game medium into a gaming area (for example, a left gaming area 207SG002L and a right gaming area 207SG002R) to play a game.
The information display unit includes a firing direction notification unit (for example, a right-handed ramp 207SG132) that notifies the firing direction of the game medium in the game area,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed in the firing direction notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27(A), (The part where the right-handed lamp 207SG132 blinks in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable notification in the firing direction notification unit.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 7 of invention 207SG,
A holding storage unit capable of storing information regarding variable display as holding information (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) is provided.
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display 207SG025A and a second hold display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage unit,
When the setting state or the confirmation state is set, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed on the hold display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. (A portion that blinks all the segments that configure the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B in the value change state and the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform a suitable notification on the hold display unit.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine described in Means 8 of Invention 207SG,
In the advantageous state, a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to enter than the first state,
The information display unit includes a number notification unit (for example, a round display 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device is in the first state in the advantageous state,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed in the number-of-times notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. (A portion that lights only one of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 in the value change state and the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable notification in the number of times notification unit.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine described in Means 8 of Invention 207SG,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game,
Detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
A state information storage unit (for example, an area of the address F002 of the RAM 102) capable of storing state information (for example, a RAM clear flag) capable of specifying the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection unit when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The game control means,
A first condition (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) including a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means is satisfied. When it is, the initialization processing for performing the initialization of the game information storage means accompanied with the deletion of the game information (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear processing shown in FIG. 8-21(A)) Is feasible,
A second condition (for example, a clear switch is ON and a lock switch) that includes a special state (for example, a clear switch ON state) of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means. When 207SG051 and open sensor 207SG090 are ON), the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial condition is executed when the first condition is satisfied. Initialization processing common to the initialization processing can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, a RAM clear processing and a setting value changing processing can be executed).
Regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the state information is not erased (for example, the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process as shown in FIG. (No part)
According to this feature, the initialization process can be made common when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. The initialization processing based on the state information can be accurately executed while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.

The present embodiment also includes Invention 208SG described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to appropriately leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the setting state. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 208SG, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process moves to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22),
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of specifying that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27(B)). In the case where an error more than the set value occurs, all segments composing the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B blink.)
According to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in the variable display area in which the variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is executed. Since it is notified by the display, it is possible to preferably notify that the predetermined condition has been satisfied but a predetermined error has occurred.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 208SG,
There is described a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined error is at least an error relating to a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, an error equal to or more than the set value). According to this feature, the set value is set. It is possible to preferably notify that an error has occurred in the storage area in which the is stored and that the setting value needs to be reset.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 208SG,
If an electric power failure occurs before the new setting value changed in the setting state is confirmed, an error related to the storage area in which the setting value is stored occurs at the time of recovery from the power failure. Even if not, the display that can specify that an error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, even when the power is restored during the setting change as shown in FIG. 287(B), the first special symbol) Display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B part to blink all the segments that make up)
According to this feature, it is necessary to re-set the set value due to the occurrence of power failure before the set value is confirmed without newly setting an error. It can be suitably notified.

The present embodiment also includes invention 209SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with an information display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding a given gaming value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit for confirming the set value and an information display unit are provided. There is a problem in that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced if these are individually provided. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 209SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium and capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc.). The part where prize balls are paid out by doing),
It has a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D), and has predetermined information on the game value provided by the game value providing means (for example, the base shown in FIG. 8-17(C)). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value),
Equipped with
The information display means can display setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, a pachinko game). When the lock switch 207SG051 and the opening sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state),
The number of the display units used is different when the predetermined information is displayed and when the setting value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029). When it is displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit is displayed. (A part where only 207SG029D is used)
According to this feature, since the set value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information about the game value, the display means for displaying the set value information is provided. Since it is not necessary to provide each separately, the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 209SG,
The information display means is capable of displaying error information capable of specifying that an error has occurred in at least the storage area in which the setting value is stored (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-26(B), When a setting value error occurs, "E." is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D),
The number of the display units used is the same when the predetermined information is displayed and when the error information is displayed (for example, FIG. 8-25(A) and FIG. 8-26(B)). As shown in FIG. 7, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display are used for displaying the base value on the display monitor 207SG029 and for displaying the occurrence of the abnormal error. (Part using 207SG029D)
According to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred regarding the storage area in which the set value is stored, and the error information is different from the set value information. Can be easily recognized.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 209SG,
The display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be turned on independently (for example, each of the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D is 8). Part consisting of individual segments),
Equipped with detection means (for example, clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
When the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means satisfies an initialization condition (for example, a clear switch is ON), the information display means is a small unit that constitutes each display unit. All of the display units are turned on to be in the full-lighted display state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-26A, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit). 207SG029D is a part that repeatedly turns on and off (flashes) all the segments that make up
According to this feature, it is possible to confirm whether or not all of the small display units are normal.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 4 of Invention 209SG,
Equipped with detection means (for example, clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
When the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detecting unit satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display unit displays the set value information without being in the all-lit display state (for example, As shown in FIG. 8-22, when the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation processing, after executing 207SGSa015 and 207SGSa016, 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm the set value.

Although the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention, Included in the invention.

For example, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, ordinary The embodiment is constituted by the symbol display 207SG020, the universal figure hold display 207SG025C, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the probability variation lamp 207SG133, and the time saving lamp 207SG134, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game information display unit 207SG200 need only include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 is executing the set value changing process (setting value changing state) and the setting value checking process is being executed (setting value checking state). The 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B have been illustrated as being in the same mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process. There may be a case where the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit or blinked in different modes depending on whether there is a setting value confirmation process or not. By doing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state depending on the lighting mode or blinking mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. You can easily tell if there is.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-mentioned embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, by turning on all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, The display mode (lighting mode) of the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B and the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result. Although different forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, the display mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state (lighting Aspect) is different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, if these first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol It is not necessary to turn on some of the segments that constitute the display device 207SG004B.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, all the segments and the round display device 207SG131 that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state, one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is blinking, the first holding display 207SG025A and the second holding display 207SG025B are formed. The blinking of all the segments to be performed may not be executed, or only a part thereof may be executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, only one of the segments configuring the round display 207SG131 is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. Is not limited to this, and if the combination does not correspond to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 8-6, the number of lit segments of the round indicator 207SG131 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is plural. It may be.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the notification of the setting value abnormality error is executed using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with an LED for error notification individually, and the LED may be turned on or blinking to notify that a setting value error has occurred.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the display monitor 207SG029 for displaying the base value is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. The display monitor 207SG029 may not be provided in the machine 1. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 as described above, a display means for displaying the set value (or the provisional set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state may be newly provided. ..

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing, the first movable body Depending on whether or not the initialization processing is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed, a new first movable body initialization processing or a second movable body initialization processing is executed. Although the mode for deciding whether or not to execute is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process, It may be determined according to the operation distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitutes the game information display portion 207SG200, The round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc. are set to be different from those in the game to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Is not limited to this, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, the round display that constitutes the game information display unit 207SG200 The device 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc. may be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game as long as it can inform that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. .

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitutes the game information display portion 207SG200, The round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc. are set to be different from those in the game to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Is not limited to this, and the “mode different from that during game” may include different blinking periods, brightness, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization are performed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. As the processing, the mode in which the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body are executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 notifies the set value change start. From the time when the command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received, the non-detection operation control of each movable body is executed, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command The actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitutes the game information display portion 207SG200, The round display 207SG131 and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 are lit or blinked to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not the one, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 may be provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position in the vicinity of the game information display unit 207SG200) to explain that lighting or blinking is performed. By doing so, the clerk of the game hall who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold It is possible to prevent the lighting or blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 from being mistakenly recognized as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main processing of the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or while the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the mode in which the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed after the flag is cleared is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing is performed. Determines that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or not after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but determines that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014 ; Y) may be performed.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-1 is a control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15. It should be noted that these control commands are, for example, effect control commands transmitted and received as electric signals.

FIG. 9-1(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 211SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals forming the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-1(A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command that specifies fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in FIG. 9-1B, for example, the result of determination as to whether the variable display result is “miss”, “big hit”, or “small hit” (predetermined result) ) Or different EXT data depending on the determination result (big hit type determination result) which one of a plurality of types is used for the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit”.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1(B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “miss”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit C” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit D” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variable stop (determination) of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , The second game state designation command corresponding to the (time saving state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specification command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to identify which error (abnormality) has occurred on the production control board 12 side. Therefore, the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification processing described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") that designates the display of the effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening to notify that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the EXT data to be set may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of times the round is executed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, "1" to "15"). To be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. a first start hole winning designating command first starting condition is notified of the establishment to perform a special symbol game using the first Japanese view of a first special symbol display device 4A. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start opening winning a prize designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the second starting mouth winning designation command is transmitted, for example, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, the total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning-time determination result designating command) indicating the contents of the winning-time determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and a big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden probability) determination result as a winning determination result. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating the determination result as to whether the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination has a variation pattern of “non-reach”, “super reach”, or “other” as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

The command C7XXH is a cycle determination value for notifying the value of the cycle determination counter for executing the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach α at each predetermined period (variation display result is a predetermined number of times missed) described later. This is a notification command.

The command C8XXH is a scenario data notification command for notifying which scenario data has been set at the end timing of the big hit game described later. The scenario data refers to data in which a plurality of values set in a cycle determination counter described later are collected.

The command C9XXH is a background image designation command for designating a background image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and a numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information are configured.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. The transmission operation of outputting various signals is also performed.

FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-2, in the characteristic portion 211SG of this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type and the variation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for determining the universal figure display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game controlling microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game controlling microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

FIG. 9-3 shows a variation pattern in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment. In the characteristic portion 211SG of the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. In addition, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is a “big hit”. Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to the case where the variation display result is "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a variation display result of "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach α, normal reach β,... A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ,... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 9C, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the super reach variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β are used. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation time of the variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach β is executed In this case, the special figure change time is set longer than the change pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

In the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, as described above, since the variation display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the jackpot expectation degree becomes high. In the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

In the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are classified into variation pattern types such as non-reach type, normal reach type, and super reach type. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern, only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination is provided, and these fluctuations are set. It is also possible to first determine the type of the variation pattern from the random number for determining the pattern type, and then determine the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. 9-4 to FIG. 9-7, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display of a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (not shown), a jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9-4, and a jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 9-6(A) and 9-6(B). , A small hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-7(C), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 9-8(A) to 9-8(E), and a universal figure display result determination table (not shown). , A universal pattern variation pattern determination table (not shown) and the like are included.

The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is the certainty variation state (highly precise state), more determination values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low certainty state) are "special hits". It is assigned to the display result. Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special map display result is set as "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. Then, compared with the probability (1/300 in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment) determined, the probability of being determined to control the big hit game state as the "big hit" is high (the present embodiment). (1/150 in the characteristic part 211SG). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability changing state (highly accurate state), the probability that the jackpot gaming state is determined to be controlled as compared with the normal state or the time saving state is determined. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

Further, in the display result determination table, the determination values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is “small hit” and controlled to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state. . Specifically, regardless of the gaming state or the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" and the small hit game state is controlled is set to 1/200.

That is, when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit D). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, determining whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make a symbol a small hit symbol.

Further, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result judgment table. However, the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table It is also possible to separately provide and to separately determine whether or not the variation display result is a big hit or a small hit.

FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101.

The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot D, based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. Is a table that is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 9-5. In the feature part 211SG of the present embodiment, as a big hit type, a big hit A and a big hit B (also referred to as uncertain variation big hits), in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state to shift to the low accuracy high base state, After the end of the big hit game, high-accuracy control and time saving control are executed, and a big hit D and a big hit E (also referred to as a probability variation big hit) are set, which shifts to a high-accuracy high base state.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" and "big hit B" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Yes, the big hit game state by "big hit C" is a normally open big hit in which a round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). The big hit game state by "big hit D" is a normally open big hit in which a round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds).

The number of time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" and the "big hit B" (the number of times the time saving control is executed) is different depending on the game state in which the big hit occurs. Specifically, when the gaming state is a low base state, the variable display result is a big hit, and when the big hit type is determined to be “big hit A” or “big hit B”, 50 times after the end of the big hit game state. Of the special figure game (variable display) is executed, or the big hit game state is entered before the special figure game of 50 times is executed. In addition, when the gaming state is a high base state, the variable display result is a big hit, and when the big hit type is determined to be “big hit A” or “big hit B”, 100 times after the big hit game state ends. The figure game (variable display) is executed, or the jackpot game state is entered before the 100 special figure games are executed, and the process ends. In addition, in the feature part 211SG of the present embodiment, two big hit types (big hit A and big hit B), which have exactly the same number of rounds and the same number of time saving control as big hit types, are provided. This is for setting different scenario data (described later) in.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state of "big hit C" or "big hit D" are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. .. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is a big hit C or a big hit D, the high-precision control and the time saving control are executed again after the big hit game state ends, so that the big hit game state continues without going through the normal state. It occurs in the so-called condominium state.

In the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, four types of big hits A to D are provided as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and big hit types are three. You may provide less than five types or five or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4, in the jackpot type determination table, if the variation special figure is the first special figure (first special symbol), 0 to 0 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. 74 are assigned to the big hit A, 75 to 149 are assigned to the big hit B, and 149 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. On the other hand, when the variation special figure is the second special figure (second special symbol), 0 to 99 is assigned to the big hit A out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, and 100 to 149 Are assigned to jackpot B, 150 to 199 are assigned to jackpot C, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot D.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the first special symbol and the special drawing game of the second special symbol, only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is finished. In addition, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the second special symbol, the number of rounds is determined to be 15 rounds more than when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the first special symbol. The rate at which the number is determined to be 5 rounds is low. In other words, when the variation special figure is the second special symbol, the payout rate is higher than when the variation special figure is the first special symbol.

In the feature part 211SG of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is predetermined that the variation display result is "big hit", and the variation display result is "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table that is used when it is determined in advance and the variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “miss” are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation patterns of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) are included. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6(A) and 9-6(B), as the big hit variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table used when the big hit type is big hit A or big hit B (For big hit A, big hit B) and big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit D, big hit E) used when big hit type is big hit C or big hit D, these big hit fluctuations are prepared. The pattern judgment table (for big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) and the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hit (for big hit D, big hit E) include a fluctuation pattern of normal reach big hit (PB1-1) and a fluctuation pattern of super reach α big hit. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of (PB1-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3) within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. ing.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A and jackpot B), 1 to 400 out of the range of MR3 determination values from 1 to 400 changes in the normal reach jackpot. It is assigned to the pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-). It is assigned to 3).

As shown in FIG. 9-6(B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot C and jackpot D), 1 to 200 out of the range of MR3 determination values from 1 to 997 is a variation in normal reach jackpot. It is assigned to the pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-). It is assigned to 3).

In this way, when the big hit A or the big hit B is won in the special drawing game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). It is higher than the rate to decide. Further, when the big hit C or the big hit D is won in the special drawing game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super-reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super-reach α big hit. It is higher than the percentage.

In other words, in the present embodiment, when these judgment values are the “big hit C” and the “big hit D”, which are sure-change big hit types, the super-reach β is likely to be determined, and the big- hit type is uncertain change. In the case of a big hit “big hit A” or “big hit B”, since the super-reach α is assigned so that it can be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super-reach β is executed, “big hit C”. It is possible to increase the player's expectation that it will be a "big hit D".

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is a determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-6(C), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, 0 to 997 in the variation value range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are variation patterns of small hits ( It is assigned to PC1-1). Although only the PC 1-1 is provided as the variation pattern for the small hit in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern for the small hit. Good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the variation pattern determination table for loss is used for the loss when the number of reserved memories is one or less in the low base state where the game state is not subjected to the time saving control. The variation pattern determination table A, the variation pattern determination table B for loss used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 in the low base state, and the total pending storage number in the low base state is 5 to 8 Loss variation pattern determination table C used in some cases, loss variation pattern determination table D used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed, and variation display is performed a predetermined number of times. Loss variation pattern determination table E used when the variation display is a predetermined cycle variation each time it is executed, and loss variation used when the variation display is a variation display four times before and after the predetermined cycle variation The pattern determination table F is prepared in advance. It should be noted that the predetermined period in the characteristic portion 211SG of the present embodiment is intended for the number of times of variation (the number of times the variation display result is lost) except that the variation display result is a big hit or a small hit. The invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined cycle may include the number of fluctuations in which the fluctuation display result is a small hit.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of β-miss (PA2-3) within the range of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach α corresponding to the total pending storage numbers 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can have with respect to the variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). There is. In the variation pattern determination table C for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach α corresponding to the total number of pending storage numbers 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of the loss pattern (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3) in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. There is.

As shown in FIG. 9C, the variation time of the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach-loss variation variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach-loss variation is further decreased. The variation time of the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of the pattern (PA1-2). Therefore, when the total pending storage number increases, the pending storage is easily digested by determining the variation pattern of non-reach loss with a short variation time, and when the pending storage number reaches the upper limit number. By starting winning, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting winnings in which reserved memory is not made, and when the number of reserved memories decreases, the fluctuation pattern of long reach time without shortening (PA1- By determining 1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not performed because the time for the variable display becomes longer.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2) during time saving control. , A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β loss.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table E for loss, all the random number values are assigned as determination values to the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α loss for the variation pattern determination random number value MR3. Has been. That is, in the predetermined cycle fluctuation in the characteristic portion 211SG of the present embodiment, if the fluctuation display result is a deviation, the fluctuation display is always executed in the super reach α deviation pattern. The invention is not limited to this, and in a predetermined cycle fluctuation, a case may be provided in which the fluctuation display is performed in a fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss.

Further, in the predetermined cycle fluctuation of the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, if the fluctuation display result is a loss, the fluctuation display is always executed in the variation pattern of the super reach α loss. The invention is not limited to this, and in a predetermined cycle fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern may be determined by lottery from the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. Furthermore, when the fluctuation pattern of the predetermined cycle fluctuation is determined by lottery from a plurality of fluctuation patterns in this manner, the fluctuation pattern is changed to a different ratio according to the remaining number of times of repeating the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of times (the value of the remaining loop number counter described later). Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined. For example, even if the value of the remaining loop counter, which will be described later, is an even value and an odd value, the determination rate of the variation pattern (variation pattern of super-reach α or super-reach β) having a long special diagram variation time may be different. Alternatively, the determination rate of a variation pattern having a long special figure variation time may be increased or decreased every time the value of the remaining loop number counter described later decreases (the variation display is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table E for loss, all the random number values in the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take on the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach loss are assigned as determination values. There is. That is, in the four fluctuations before and after the predetermined cycle fluctuation in the characteristic portion 211SG of the present embodiment, if the fluctuation display results of the four fluctuations before and after the predetermined cycle fluctuation are misalignment, these fluctuation displays are always non-reach misalignment (PA1-2). It is designed to be executed according to the fluctuation pattern.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 is provided with a game control data holding area 211SG150 as shown in FIG. 9-8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling progress of the game. Has been. The game control data holding area 211SG150 shown in FIG. 9-8 is a first special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 211SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 211SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 211SG153, a game control counter setting unit 211SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 211SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151A, the game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning hole formed by the prize ball device 6A, the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred, but has not yet started. The pending data of the figure game (special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning hole, and the first starting condition for the passage (entry) of the game ball is set. Pending data such as a random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, a random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the establishment. Is stored until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151A indicates that execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not to be a big hit.

Although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning prize (second starting winning prize) has been generated, the second special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151B has not yet started. The pending data of the special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151B associates the winning number into the second starting winning opening (the order in which the game balls are detected) with the holding number, and sets the second starting condition for the passage (entry) of the game balls. Pending data such as a random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, a random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 based on the establishment Is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151B indicates that execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is displayed. Based on the (result), it becomes the holding information that enables the determination of whether or not to be a big hit.

The holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entry) through the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passing (entry) through the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning due to this may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, starting port data indicating which of the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the holding information and may be stored in association with the holding number. ..

The ordinary figure holding storage unit 211SG151C stores the holding information of the ordinary figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the public figure reservation storage unit 211SG151C is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate 41, and the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result determination from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number MR4 for use as reserved data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The game control flag setting unit 211SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 211SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. The game control timer setting unit 211SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 211SG153 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 211SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 211SG154, a cycle determination counter for determining whether or not the fluctuation display is a predetermined cycle fluctuation, and a number of times (remaining loop number) for repeating the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times are determined. Data indicating a remaining loop number counter and the like for enabling is stored. The game control counter setting unit 211SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random number so that the CPU 103 can update it by software. In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 211SG154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical value data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 211SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 211SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, effect control data holding as shown in FIG. 9-9(A) is held. Area 211SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 211SG190 shown in FIG. 9-9(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 211SG191, a production control timer setting unit 211SG192, a production control counter setting unit 211SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 211SG194. I have it. The production control flag setting unit 211SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to a production operation state such as a production image display state on the screen of the image display device 5 or a production control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 211SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of the plurality of types of flags. The effect control timer setting unit 211SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the operation of displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 211SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of the plurality of types of timers. The effect control counter setting unit 211SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 211SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. The effect control buffer setting unit 211SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 211SG194 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the data forming the start winning award reception command buffer 211SG194A as shown in FIG. 9-9(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting part 211SG194. In the start winning award reception command buffer 211SG194A, in the storage area (buffer numbers “1-1” to “1-4”) corresponding to the maximum value (eg, “4”) of the total reserved storage number of the first special figure reserved storages. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure being displayed in a variable manner are provided. In addition, in the start winning award reception command buffer 211SG194A, a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total reserved memory number of the second special figure reserved memories. , And a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being displayed in a variable manner. When there is a starting winning prize to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designating command, variable category designation The command and the pending storage number notification command (the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command) five commands of the cycle determination value notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. It The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning award reception command buffer 211SG194A are these start mouth winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) for separately storing the first special figure pending storage and the second special figure pending storage in association with the pending storage number notification command and the cycle determination value notification command is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest-order reserved storage (buffer number “1-1” or buffer number “2-1”) is started. As described above, the storage contents of the buffer number “1-0” or the buffer number “2-0” that stores the contents of the pending storage in which the start condition is satisfied are shifted to the upper position one by one, It is adapted to be cleared in the decorative pattern variation stop processing which is executed when terminating.

Further, in the start winning award reception command buffer 211SG194A, the display pattern is not decided yet in the pre-reading notice setting process (FIG. 9-24) which will be described later, in accordance with the presence/absence of execution of the pending display notice effect. Whether or not there is, that is, due to the occurrence of a new start winning, the start mouth winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category designation command, the reserved storage number notification command, the cycle determination value notification command is newly stored A display undecided flag indicating that the determination of the pattern is undecided, and a hold display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set are the first special figure hold storage and the A storage area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that the storage area can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the 2 special figure reservation storage. Incidentally, in the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when execution of the hold display notice effect is not decided in the prefetching notice setting decision process described later. By doing so, the reserved storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 211SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 211SG005U, and execution of the reserved display notice effect is determined. Is a "1" (rectangle (◇)) or "2" (star) corresponding to the display pattern of the reserved storage display in a special mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. (☆) is set, a reserved memory display of a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 211SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 211SG005U, and the reserved memory display is displayed. In the corresponding variable display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

In addition, in the first hold storage display area 211SG005D and the second hold storage display area 211SG005U in the feature part 211SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the number of hold memories of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game (special figure hold storage number). Is an area where the reserved storage display is performed, and is provided below the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9-27).

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending storage of the start winning award reception command buffer 211SG194A at the time of the start winning at the first start winning opening. Then, at the time of the start winning at the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entries corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the start winning prize reception command buffer 211SG194A. Go At the time of starting winning, the commands from the starting mouth winning designation command to the period determination value notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start mouth winning award designation command is placed in the storage areas corresponding to the tails "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending storage or the second special figure pending storage, respectively. The symbol designating command, the variation category designating command, the pending storage number notification command, and the cycle determination value notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning award reception command buffer 211SG194A shown in FIG. The entry stored in the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2" corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entry after the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 9-9(B), when the variable display of the decorative design in the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number “0” is deleted, and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “3” and “4” are shifted to the areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “2” and “3”. Therefore, the buffer number “0” becomes an area (entry) for storing each command relating to the pending storage which is variably displayed at that time.

Next, each process in the special symbol process process in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment will be described. 9-10 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines that the first starting port switch 22A is based on the detection signal from the first starting port switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether it is on (211SGS100). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is turned on (211SGS100; Y), the first special figure reservation storage number, which is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is “4”) (211SGS101). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special figure reservation storage number by reading the first reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 211SG154, for example. When the first special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in 211SGSS101 (211SGS101; N), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 211SG155 is set to "1" (211SGS102). ..

When the first starting opening switch 22A is off in 211SGS100 (211SGS100; N) and when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit in 211SGS101 (211SGS101; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B. It is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by (211SGS103). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is turned on (211SGS103; Y), the second special figure reservation storage number, which is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is “4”) (211SGS104). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reservation storage number by reading the second reservation storage number count value that is the stored value of the second reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 211SG154, for example. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in 211SGS104 (211SGS104; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 211SG155 is set to "2" (211SGS105). ..

After performing any of the processing of 211SGS102 and 211SGS105, it updates so that the special figure reservation storage number according to the starting mouth buffer value which is the stored value of the starting mouth buffer may be incremented by 1 (211SGS107). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second suspension storage count value is incremented by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the first special drawing is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the second special drawing is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is also updated so as to be incremented by 1 (211SGS108). For example, the total reserved storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 211SG154, may be updated so as to be incremented by one.

After executing the processing of 211SGS108, the CPU 103 selects from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 211SG154, the random value MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (211SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number thus extracted is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (211SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151B.

Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”, Is used to determine the type of big hit when the variable display result is "big hit". The random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is used to determine a fluctuation pattern including a variable display time of a special symbol or a decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 211SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts the numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for the determination of the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Subsequent to the processing of 211SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting mouth winning designation command according to the starting mouth buffer value is performed (211SGS111). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting mouth winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning award designation command to 12 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning award designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 is notified. The setting for transmitting the second start opening winning award designation command is performed. The start opening winning award designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. To be done.

Following the process of 211SGS111, a winning random number determination process is executed (211SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the reservation storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reservation storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. (211 SGS 114) is set. The reservation storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. To be done.

After executing the processing of 211SGS114, it is determined whether or not the starting opening buffer value is "1" (211SGS115). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (211SGS115; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (211SGS216), and then the process proceeds to 211SGS103. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (211SGS115; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (211SGS117), and the starting winning determination processing is performed. To finish. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 9-11(A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in the 211SGS 112 of FIG. 9-10 as the winning random number value determination process. In the characteristic portion 211SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol normal processing (see FIG. 9-13) described later causes the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol). ) As "big hit" to control in the big hit gaming state, and whether to control the special figure display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as "small hit" to the small hit gaming state is determined. . Further, in a variation pattern setting process (see FIG. 9-14) described later, determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the random number value determination processing at the time of winning at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), As a special figure display result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that a big hit design or a small hit design is to be derived and displayed, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative design is a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning opening is started, that is, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made at the start of the variable symbol. Before, it is judged whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this judgment result, the effect As will be described later, the hold display advance notice effect is executed by the control CPU 120 and the like.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 9-11(A), the CPU 103 first checks the state of the time saving flag or the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 211SG152, etc. The current game state in the machine 1 is specified (S211SG121). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is necessary to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of 211SGS121, the display result determination table is selected and set (211SGS122). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted by 211SGS109 of FIG. 9-10 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (211SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to special figure display results of "big hit" and "small hit" in the display result determination table selected by the processing of 211SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1. It suffices to be able to determine the presence or absence of a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing each determination value one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment values included in the big hit judgment range and the small hit judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the big hit judgment range or the small hit. It suffices to be able to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range or the small hit determination range by comparing the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range or the small hit determination range, the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number value MR1 becomes “big hit” or “small hit”. It can be judged that it is decided.

When 211SGS123 determines that it is not within the big hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the big hit does not occur during variable display (211SGS123; N), the special figure display extracted by 211SGS109 in FIG. 9-10. It is determined whether or not the numerical value data indicating the random number MR1 for result determination is within the predetermined small hit determination range (211SGS123a). If the 211SGS 123a determines that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not result in a small hit (211SGS 123a; N), the variable display result is "missed". The transmission setting of the symbol designating command is executed (122SGS124). The symbol designating command according to the thus set deviation is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 is executed, and the like, from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. Transmitted. Then, it is determined whether the time saving flag is set, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (211SGS125). If the time saving flag is not set (211SGS125; N), the variation pattern determination table for loss A shown in FIG. 9-7(A) is selected and set, and if the time saving flag is set (211SGS125; Y), the variation pattern determination table for loss D shown in FIG. 9-7(D) is selected and set (211SGS127).

The loss variation pattern determination table A is a loss variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved memories is one or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss, which is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In addition to the loss variation pattern determination table A and the loss variation pattern determination table D, the feature unit 211SG of the present embodiment uses the loss used when the total number of pending storage is 2 to 4. Variation pattern determination table B for use, the variation pattern determination table C for use when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8, and the like are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. In the variation pattern determination tables A for loss among the variation pattern determination tables A to D, values from 1 to 450 in the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take are assigned to the non-reach variation patterns. In the variation pattern determination tables for loss B and C, a value exceeding 1 to 500 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern can take. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D, the values 701 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns of super reach in the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss in the 211SGS 126, the determination of non-reach and super-reach can be made without fail even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since the variation pattern is used, the determination is made by using the variation pattern determination table A for loss in the determination at the time of starting winning.

As shown in FIG. 9-11(A), when it is determined by the 211SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is displayed when the variation is displayed (211SGS123; Y), the jackpot type determination is made. The jackpot type is determined on the basis of the random number value MR2 for S (S128). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , Big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data forming the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, the transmission setting of the symbol designating command according to the jackpot type determined in 211SGS128 is executed (211SGS129). The symbol designating command according to the big hit set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. Transmitted. Then, as a table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot variation patterns, a jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (211SGS130).

Further, if it is determined in the 211SGS124 that it is within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the small hit occurs during variable display (211SGS124; Y), the transmission setting of the symbol designating command corresponding to the small hit. Is performed (211SGS131a). The symbol designating command corresponding to the small hit set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to. Then, as the table for determining the small hit variation pattern, the small hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (211SGS131b).

After performing any of the processing of 211SGS126, 211SGS127, 211SGS130, 211SGS131b, numerical data showing the fluctuation pattern determination table and the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination set by the processing of 211SGS126, 211SGS127, 211SGS130, 211SGS131. Is used to determine the variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random value MR3 (211SGS132). In the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-11(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the common "non-reach" regardless of the total pending storage number. The change category that is the change display mode, the change category that is the change display mode of “Super Reach”, and the “Other” that is the change display mode other than “Non-reach” and “Super reach” (for example, normal reach or small hit) It suffices to provide a variation category and determine whether or not such variation category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, the setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 211SGS132 to the production control board 12 is performed (211SGS133). Then, the value of the cycle determination counter is specified (211SGS134), and it is determined whether or not any value of 1 to 128 is set in the cycle determination counter (211SGS135). As will be described later in detail, the state in which the numerical value of 0 to 128 is set in the cycle determination counter in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment means that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start. (When the power is turned on with the clear switch being operated) After that, it has been controlled to be in a time saving state at least once (being in a state where a big hit game state of uncertain variation big hit has been passed). Further, the state in which the cycle determination counter is set to 0 means that the predetermined cycle variation display of the predetermined number of times (the same number as the initial value set in the remaining loop number counter) has already been completed, and then the time saving state is controlled. It is shown that the predetermined period fluctuation display is not executed until the predetermined time.

When any value of 1 to 128 is set in the cycle determination counter (211SGS135; Y), a cycle determination value notification command according to the value of the cycle determination counter and the game state is sent to the effect control board 12. The setting for transmitting to the player is performed (211SGS136), and the winning random number determination process is ended. Further, when any one of the values 1 to 128 is not set in the cycle determination counter (211SGS135; N), that is, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not yet controlled to the time saving state after being activated. In this case, or when the predetermined period variation display is not executed until the next time saving control, it is considered that the value of the period determination counter is set to "128", and the " 128” is set to transmit a cycle determination value notification command to the effect control board 12 (211SGS137), and the winning random number determination processing ends.

The cycle determination value notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. To be done.

In addition, the numerical value of the cycle determination value notification command transmitted by the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in the 211SGS 136 and 211SGS 137 varies depending on the gaming state. That is, as shown in FIG. 9-11(C), when the gaming state is the low base state, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a value obtained by subtracting 5 from the value of the cycle determination counter as the value of the cycle determination value notification command. When the gaming state is the high base state, the transmission setting is performed with the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the cycle determination counter as the value of the cycle determination value notification command.

When the value obtained by subtracting 5 from the value of the cycle determination counter becomes a negative value (any one of -1 to -4) in the low base state, the CPU 103 causes the negative amount to be stored in the next cycle determination counter. A transmission setting is performed as a value obtained by subtracting an initial value (a value set as an initial value of the next cycle in scenario data described later) as the value of the cycle determination value notification command.

As described above, in the characteristic part 211SG in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 9-10 and the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. Each time a prize is generated, a start winning opening designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category designation command, a reserved memory number notification command, and a cycle determination value notification command are transmitted to the production control board 12, and these commands are received at the time of starting winning. It is adapted to be stored in the corresponding entry of the command buffer 211SG194A.

As shown in FIGS. 9-12(A) and 9-12(B), regarding the cycle determination value notification command among these commands, when the start winning of 1 occurs during each fluctuation display, While a cycle determination value notification command having a different value is transmitted to the effect control board 12, when a start winning occurs a plurality of times during the variable display of 1, a random number value determination at the time of winning based on each starting winning. The process is executed, and the cycle determination value notification command indicating the same value is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

9-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (211SGS141). The second special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of 211SGS141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 211SG154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number in 211SGS141 is other than "0" (211SGS141; N), as the reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151B corresponding to the reservation number "1". Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read (211SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, stored in a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Subsequent to the processing of 211SGS142, the second special figure reservation storage number count value and the total reservation storage number count value are decremented by 1 and updated, and the second special figure reservation storage number and the total reservation storage number are decremented by one. And the data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151B are updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries (eg, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) lower than the reservation number “1” in the second special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151B are set. The reserved data shown is shifted upward by one entry (211SGS143).

After that, the value of the variable special map designation buffer, which is the value stored in the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (211SGS144), and then the process proceeds to 211SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation storage number is “0” in 211SGS141 (211SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation storage number is “0” (211SGS145). The first special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of 211SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit 211SG154 reads the first reserved storage number count value stored in the first reserved storage number counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Good. In this way, the processing of 211SGS145 is executed when the 211SGS141 determines that the second special figure pending storage number is "0", and whether the first special figure pending storage number is "0". To determine. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

The special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure. For example, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be used. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls have entered (passed) and the starting winnings have occurred. In this case, a table is provided to store data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated, and the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It only has to be decided.

When the first special figure reservation storage number in 211SGS145 is other than "0" (211SGS145; N), as the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151A corresponding to the reservation number "1". Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out (211SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, stored in a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Subsequent to the processing of 211SGS146, the first special figure reservation storage number count value and the total reservation storage number count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, and the like, thereby causing the first special figure reservation storage number and the total reservation storage number to be subtracted by one. Thus, the data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the holding number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “4”) in the first special figure holding storage unit 211SG151A are stored. The reserved data shown is shifted upward by one entry (211SGS147).

After that, the variable special map designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special map designation buffer is updated to "1" (211SGS148), and then the process proceeds to 211SGS149.

In 211SGS149, the above-mentioned display result determination table is used as a use table for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “miss”. Select and set. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “miss”. By comparing with the value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “miss” (211SGS150). Incidentally, in this 211SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is set, for example, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is 1020 to 1079, 13320. If it falls within the range of 13757 to 13757, it is determined to be a "big hit", if it falls within the range of 32767 to 33094, it is determined to be a "small hit", and if it does not fall, it is determined to be "miss". If the probability variation flag is not set (normal state or time saving state), for example, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1020 to 1237, it is determined as "big hit". It is determined that if it falls within the range of 32767 to 33094, it is determined as “small hit”, and if it does not fall, it is determined as “miss”.

In this way, in the special figure display result determination table selected by the 211SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" corresponding to the gaming state (high accuracy, low accuracy) at that time, so 211SGS150 In the process of, the special figure display result is determined to be a "big hit" by using different determination data (determination value) depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is the highly accurate state. By determining whether or not to, "when the gaming state is the high-probability state, it is determined as a "big hit" with a higher probability than when the gaming state is the low-probability state.

After the special figure display result is determined by the 211SGS 150, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a “big hit” (211SGS 151). Then, when it is determined that the "big hit" (211SGS151; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 211SG152 is set to the ON state (211SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9-4 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types (211SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data showing the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation and each jackpot type of jackpot A to jackpot type E in the jackpot type determination table Which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be determined is determined according to which of the determination values assigned to (211 SGS 154).

By determining the type of jackpot in the processing of 211SGS154, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is ended, whichever of the gaming state is a time saving state or a probability variation state that is more advantageous to the player than the time saving state. Whether to control will be determined before the definite special symbol as the variable display result is derived. In accordance with the jackpot type thus determined, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 211SG155 (211SGS155), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is big hit A, the big hit type buffer value is "0", if the big hit type is big hit B, the big hit type buffer value is "1", and if big hit type is big hit C, big hit type buffer If the value is "2" and the big hit type is big hit D, the big hit type buffer value may be "3".

On the other hand, when the 211SGS 151 determines that it is not a “big hit” (211SGS 151; N), it is determined whether the special figure display result is a “small hit” (211SGS 156). Then, when it is determined to be a "small hit" (211SGS156; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 211SG152 is set to the ON state (211SGS157).

When the special figure display result is not "small hit" (211SGS156; N), after the execution of 211SGS155, 211SGS157, the fixed special symbol is determined (211SGS158). For example, the special symbol indicating the lost symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol in correspondence with the pre-determined result indicating that the special symbol display result is “miss”. In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol display result is “big hit” in 211SGS151, one of the special symbols indicating the big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type in 211SGS154. To do. When the special symbol display result is determined to be "small hit" in 211SGS156, one of the special symbols indicating the small hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in 211SGS158, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (211SGS159), the special symbol normal process is ended.

In addition, when the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” in 211SGS145 (211SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demo display setting (211SGS161), the special symbol normal The process ends. In this demo display setting, for example, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not it has been transmitted to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting ends.

9-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (211SGS171). If the big hit flag is on (211SGS171; Y), a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the big hit type is selected and set as a use table for determining the change pattern as one of a plurality of kinds ( 211 SGS 172).

When the big hit flag is off in 211SGS171 (211SGS171; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (211SG173). When the small hit flag is on (211SGS173; Y), the small hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (211SGS174).

When the small hit flag is off in 211SGS173 (211SG173; N), it is determined whether or not any value of 1 to 128 is set in the cycle determination counter (211SGS175). When any value of 1 to 128 is set in the cycle determination counter (122SGS175; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the remaining loop number counter value is already 0 (211SGS176). When the value of the remaining loop number counter is not 0, that is, when the predetermined period variation display can be executed (211SGS176; N), whether the value of the period determination counter is 1 to 4 is further determined. Is determined (211SGS177).

When the value of the cycle determination counter is neither 1 to 4 (211SGS177; N), it is determined whether the value of the cycle determination counter is 6 to 9 (211SGS178). When the value of the cycle determination counter is any one of 1 to 4 (211SGS177; Y) and when the value of the cycle determination counter is any of 6 to 9 (211SGS178; Y), the variation pattern determination for loss. The table F is selected and set (211SGS179).

When the value of the cycle determination counter is neither 6 to 9 (211SGS178; N), it is determined whether the value of the cycle determination counter is 5 (211SGS180). When the value of the cycle determination counter is 5 (211SGS180; Y), it is further determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, the high base state (211SGS181). If the time saving flag is not set (211SGS181; N), the loss variation pattern determination table E is selected and set (211SGS182), and if the time saving flag is set (211SGS181; Y), loss variation is selected. The pattern determination table D is selected and set (211SGS184).

When none of the values 1 to 128 is set in the cycle determination counter (211SGS175; N), the value of the cycle determination counter is 0 (211SGS176; Y). When it is not 5 (211SGS180; N), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (211SGS183). If the time saving flag is set (211SGS183; Y), the variation pattern determination table for loss D is selected and set (211SGS184), and if the time saving flag is not set (211SGS183; N), the sum pending storage is performed. It is determined whether the number is 2 or more (211SGS185).

If the total number of pending storages is 1 or less (211SGS185; N), the variation pattern determination table A for loss is selected and set (211SGS186), and if the total number of pending storages is 2 or more (211SHS185; Y), Then, it is further determined whether or not the total pending storage number is 5 or more (211SGS187).

When the number of total pending storage is 4 or less (211SGS187; N), the variation pattern determination table for loss B is selected and set (211SGS188), and when the total number of pending storage is 5 or more (211SGS187; Y). Selects and sets the variation pattern determination table C for loss (211SGS189).

After performing any one of the processing of 211SGS172, 211SGSGS174, 211SGS179, 211SGS182, 211SGS184, 211SGS186, 211SGS188, 211SGS189, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the random number buffer for fluctuations or the like. Based on the above, by referring to either the selected jackpot variation pattern determination table or the lost variation pattern determination tables A to F, one of the variation patterns is determined (211SGS190).

That is, in the characteristic unit 211SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-15, when the gaming state is the low base state and the value of the cycle determination counter is 5, the variation pattern determination table for loss E is displayed. Is set, the predetermined cycle fluctuation display (super reach α fluctuation display) is executed, and in the fluctuation display four times before and after the predetermined cycle fluctuation display, the fluctuation pattern determination table F for loss is set. The variable display is executed by the non-reach fluctuation pattern. Further, when the value of the cycle determination counter is 10, any of the variation patterns for loss, normal reach, and super reach are set by setting any of the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D. Fluctuating display is executed.

Incidentally, when the variation display result is a loss and the value of the cycle determination counter is 5, the variation pattern determination table D for the loss is set if the gaming state is the high base state, so normal reach or super reach There is a case where the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of. Also, in the case where the variation display result is a loss and the value of the cycle determination counter is any of 1 to 4 and 6 to 9, if the gaming state is the high base state, the variation pattern determination table for the loss is D. Since it is set, the variable display may be executed in the variation pattern of normal reach or super reach.

When the jackpot flag is off, the variation pattern is determined in the process of 211SGS190, and it is determined whether or not the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach". That is, the process of 211SGS190 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative pattern is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “miss”.

After returning to FIG. 9-14 and determining the variation pattern in 211SGS190, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special figure according to the variation special figure designation buffer value. To start any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol on the symbol display device 4B, the setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is made (211SGS191). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Subsequent to the processing of 211SGS191, the setting for transmitting various commands for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed (211SGS192). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 causes the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 to enter a game state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variation display result. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the first reserved storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared beforehand is set as the game control buffer setting unit 211SG155. The data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 causes the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 to enter a game state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variation display result. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the second reserved storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 211SG155. Store in the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After the processing of 211SGS192 is executed, the special figure variation time which is the variation display time of the special design which corresponds to the decision result of the variation pattern is set (211SGS193). The special symbol variation time, which is the variation display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite display of the fixed special symbol that is the variation display result (special symbol display result) Is. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (211SGS194), and the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Based on the command transmission setting in 211SGS192, every time the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 issues a game state designation command to the effect control board 12. The first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the fluctuation display result designation command, the first reserved storage number notification command, or the second reserved storage number notification command will be sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variation display result designation command is transmitted first, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command. The game state designation command, the first reserved storage number notification command, or the second reserved storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

FIG. 9-16 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first terminates the variation of the special symbol, and performs control to derive and display the stop symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B (211SGS201). In addition, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, control for transmitting the symbol confirmation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (211SGS202). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (211SGS203), and when the big hit flag is not set (211SGS203; N), the process proceeds to 211SGS213.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is set (211SGS203; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the type of the big hit is an uncertain variation big hit (big hit A or big hit B) (211SGS204). When the type of the big hit is the uncertain variation big hit (211SGS204; Y), it is further determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (211SGS205). If the hour-shortening flag is set (211SGS205; Y), the high-base medium-big hit flag indicating that the variable display result is a big hit in the high-base state (time-shortening state) is set (211SGS206).

Further, when the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot (211SGS204; N), when the time saving flag is not set (211SGS205; N), after the execution of 211SGS206, the CPU 103 determines that the probability variation flag or the time saving flag is set. , The probability variation flag and the time saving flag are cleared (211SGS207), and the jackpot start 1 designation command (jackpot A), jackpot start 2 designation command (jackpot B), jackpot start 3 designation command (in accordance with the stored jackpot type). The setting for transmitting either the big hit C) or the big hit start 4 designation command (big hit D) to the production control board 12 is performed (211 SGS 208).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (211SGS209).

Then, the jackpot display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time at which the image display device 5 notifies that the jackpot has occurred) (211SGS210). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times for big hit A and big hit B, 10 times for big hit C, and 15 times for big hit D) is set in the special winning opening opening counter (211SGS211).

Further, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value according to the big hit opening preprocessing (211SGS212), and ends the special symbol stop processing.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag has been set in the 211SGS 213 (211SGS 213). When the small hit flag is set (211SGS213; Y), the setting for transmitting the small hit start designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (211SGS214).

Then, the small hit display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the small hit display time (a time at which, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the small hit has occurred) (211SGS215). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, two times for a small hit) is set in the special winning opening opening counter (211SGS216). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing, and the special symbol stop processing is ended (211SGS217).

When the small hit flag is not set in the 211SGS 213 (211SGS 213; N), the CPU 103 determines whether the probability variation flag is set (211SGS 218). When the probability variation flag is set (211SGS218; Y), the process proceeds to 211SGS231, and when the probability variation flag is not set (211SGS218; N), it is determined whether the time saving flag is further set (211SGS219). When the time saving flag is not set (211SGS219; N), the processing proceeds to 211SGS223, and when the time saving flag is set (211SGSa219; Y), the value of the time saving frequency counter is decremented by -1 (211SGS220), and the time saving frequency counter is set. It is determined whether or not the value of has become 0 (211SGS221).

When the value of the hour/hour count counter becomes 0 (211SGS221; Y), the hour/hour flag is cleared and the process proceeds to 211SGS223 (211SGS222). If the value of the hour/hour counter is not 0 (211SGS221; N), the process of 211SGS222 is not executed and the process proceeds to 211SGS223.

In the 211SGS223, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the cycle determination counter is set (211SGS223). If the cycle determination counter is not set, that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been controlled to the time saving state even once after being started by cold start (211SGS223; N), the processing proceeds to 211SGS231, and the cycle determination counter. Is set (211SGS223; Y), it is determined whether or not the value set in the cycle determination counter is 0 (211SGS224).

When the value set in the cycle determination counter is 0 (211SGS224; Y), the process proceeds to 211SGS227, and when the value set in the cycle determination counter is not 0 (211SGS224; N), the cycle determination The value of the counter is decremented by -1 (211SGS225), and it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle determination counter becomes 0 (211SGS226). When the value of the cycle determination counter is 0 (211SGS226; Y), the processing proceeds to 211SGS227, and when the value of the cycle determination counter is not 0 (211SGS226; N), the processing proceeds to 211SGS230.

In the 211SGS227, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the remaining loop number counter is 0 (211SGS227). When the value of the remaining loop number counter is 0 (211SGS227; Y), the process proceeds to 211SGS230, and when the value of the remaining loop number counter is not 0 (211SGS227; N), the value of the remaining loop number counter is decremented by -1. (211SGS228), based on the set scenario data (see FIG. 9-18), a value corresponding to the value of the remaining loop number counter is set in the cycle determination counter (211SGS229), and the process proceeds to 211SGS230.

Incidentally, as will be described later in detail, in the feature portion 211SG of the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit game, depending on the type of big hit and the gaming state in which the big hit has occurred, from the first cycle (first time) to the maximum of 14 cycles (14 The scenario data (scenario data A to scenario data D shown in FIG. 9-18) including the number of fluctuations according to the cycle (remaining number of loops) up to the (th) is set, and is set in the processing of 211SGS229. A value corresponding to the value of the remaining loop counter is set in the cycle determination counter from the scenario data.

In the 211SGS230, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the cycle determination value notification command (211SGS230), and proceeds to 211SGS231. Then, the CPU 103 sets transmission of the game state designation command according to the state of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag in the 211SGS226 (211SGS226). The game state designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Further, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the background image designation command according to the state of the time saving flag and the values of the cycle determination counter and the remaining loop number counter (211SGS232).

Incidentally, the game state designating command and the background image designating command are executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value according to the special symbol normal process, and ends the special symbol stop process (211SGS233).

FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit ending process. In the big hit ending process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end display timer is in operation (211SGS241). When the big hit end display timer is not operating (211SGS241; N), the big hit end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) for performing the big hit end display on the image display device 5. The setting is made (211SGS242), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating (211SGS241; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by -1 (211SGS243). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (211SGS244). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (211SGS244; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot (jackpot C or jackpot D) (211SGS245).

When the big hit type is a non-probable variable big hit (big hit A or big hit B) (211SGS245; N), a time saving flag is set (211SGS246), and it is determined whether the high base medium big hit flag is set (211SGS247). .. If the high-base medium-big hit flag is not set, that is, if the big hit is an uncertain variation big hit that has occurred in the low-base state (211SGS247; N), the time saving counter is set to "50" and the process proceeds to (211SGS250). .. If the high-base medium-big hit flag is set, that is, if the big hit is an uncertain variation big hit that has occurred in the high-base state (211SHS247; Y), the time saving counter is set to "100" (211SGS249). , 211 SGS250.

In the 211SGS250, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot is the jackpot A (211SGS250). When the jackpot type is the jackpot A (211SGS250; Y), "14" is set in the remaining loop number counter (211SGS251), and it is determined whether or not the high base medium-big hit flag is set (211SGS252). If the high-base medium-big hit flag is not set (211SGS252; N), the scenario data A shown in FIG. 9-18(A) is set and the process proceeds to 211SGS261 (211SGS253), and the high-base medium-big hit flag is set. If it is (211SGS252; Y), the scenario data B shown in FIG. 9-18(B) is set, the high base medium and big hit flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to 211SGS261 (211SGS254, 211SGS255).

Further, when the big hit type is the big hit B in the 211SGS250 (211SGS250; N), "13" is set in the remaining loop number counter (211SGS256), and it is determined whether or not the high base medium big hit flag is set ( 211 SGS257). When the high base medium and big hit flag is not set (211SGS257; N), the scenario data C shown in FIG. 9-18(C) is set and the process proceeds to 211SGS261 (211SGS258), and the high base medium and big hit flag is set. If it is (211SGS257; Y), the scenario data D shown in FIG. 9-18(D) is set, the high base medium and big hit flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to 211SGS261 (211SGS259, 211SGS260).

Then, in 211 SGS 261, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the remaining loop number counter in the set scenario data in the cycle determination counter.

Here, the scenario data will be described. As shown in FIGS. 9-18(A) and 9-18(B), the scenario data A and the big hit of the big hit A which are set when the time saving control is carried out at a maximum of 50 times after the big hit of the big hit A is finished. The scenario data B set when the time saving control is carried out at a maximum of 100 times after the end of the game is scenario data for executing a predetermined cycle variation for a maximum of 14 cycles. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-18(C) and FIG. 9-18(D), scenario data C and big hit B set when the time saving control is carried out at maximum 50 times after the big hit B big hit game ends. The scenario data D, which is set when the time saving control is performed 100 times at the maximum after the big hit game, is the scenario data for executing the predetermined cycle fluctuation over the maximum 13 cycles. In other words, in the characteristic part 211SG in the present embodiment, with respect to the scenario data set after the big hit game of the uncertain variation big hit, the maximum cycle for executing the predetermined cycle variation differs depending on the big hit type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-18(A), when the scenario data A is set, if the value of the remaining loop counter is “14” (first cycle), the CPU 103 executes the above described 211SGS261. In the processing, the cycle determination counter is set to "50" which is the maximum number of times of time saving control. After that, the CPU 103 sets “79” to the cycle determination counter if the value of the remaining loop number counter is “13” (second cycle) in the processing of the 211SGS229 (see FIG. 9-16) described above. If the value of the remaining loop number counter is “12” or less (after the third period including after the value of the remaining loop number counter becomes “0”), “128” is set to the period determination counter.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-18(B), when the scenario data B is set, if the value of the remaining loop counter is “14” (first cycle), the CPU 103 executes the above described 211SGS261. In the process, the cycle determination counter is set to "100", which is the maximum execution count of the time saving control. After that, the CPU 103 sets “79” to the cycle determination counter if the value of the remaining loop number counter is “13” (second cycle) in the processing of the 211SGS229 (see FIG. 9-16) described above. If the value of the remaining loop number counter is “12” or less (after the third period including after the value of the remaining loop number counter becomes “0”), “128” is set to the period determination counter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-18(C), when the scenario data C is set, the CPU 103 determines that the value of the remaining loop number counter is “13” (first cycle), the value of the 211SGS 261 described above. In the processing, the cycle determination counter is set to "50" which is the maximum number of times of time saving control. Thereafter, in the processing of the processing of 211SGS229 described above (see FIG. 9-16), the CPU 103 includes the value of the remaining loop number counter of “12” or less (including after the value of the remaining loop number counter becomes “0”). If it is after the first cycle), "128" is set in the cycle determination counter.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-18(D), when the scenario data C is set, the CPU 103 determines that the value of the remaining loop counter is “13” (first cycle), the value of 211SGS 261 described above. In the process, the cycle determination counter is set to "100", which is the maximum execution count of the time saving control. Thereafter, in the processing of the processing of 211SGS229 described above (see FIG. 9-16), the CPU 103 includes the value of the remaining loop number counter of “12” or less (including after the value of the remaining loop number counter becomes “0”). If it is after the first cycle), "128" is set in the cycle determination counter.

That is, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-18(A) to 9-18(D), the scenario data set after the big hit game of the big hit A is for cycle determination. As numerical values (number of fluctuations) that can be set in the counter, a total of four numerical values of “50”, “100”, “79”, and “128” are provided in advance, and are set after the jackpot B big hit game ends. Regarding the scenario data, three numerical values of “50”, “100”, and “128” are provided in advance as numerical values (number of fluctuations) that can be set in the cycle determination counter.

Further, in the characteristic portion 211SG of the present embodiment, the same value as the number of times of fluctuations in which the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is set in the cycle determination counter, and the cycle determination counter is generated every time a start winning is generated. Since a cycle judgment value notification command (a command including a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the cycle judgment counter; see Fig. 9-11) according to the value of is transmitted, the command for notifying the number of remaining time saving control is individually It is also possible to notify the effect control CPU 120 of the remaining number of time saving control without being provided.

It should be noted that, even when any of the scenario data A to the scenario data D is set, if the value set in the cycle determination counter is any of 1 to 9 in the time-saving state, As shown in 211SGS175 to 211SGS181, the variable display is not executed only by the non-reach change pattern, and the variable display is not always executed by the super reach α change pattern.

That is, during the time saving control in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the value of the cycle determination counter is decremented and updated each time the variable display is finished, while the value of the cycle determination counter is updated if the variable display result is lost. Irrespective of whether the variation pattern is determined from non-reach, normal reach, or super reach (variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table D for loss, variation pattern determination table for loss E or variation pattern determination table for loss F It does not determine the variation pattern using).

As described above, when the scenario data A or the scenario data B is set during the big hit game ending process in the feature part 211SG of the present embodiment, first, as shown in FIG. When the variable display is executed the same number of times (50 times or 100 times) as the number of time saving control in the eye and the game state changes to the low base state, the 75th time is displayed as a predetermined cycle change among the 79 times of the second cycle display. The variation display of is performed with the variation pattern of super reach α. Then, in each of the third to fourteenth cycles, of the 128 fluctuation displays, the 124th fluctuation display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of super reach α.

Further, when the scenario data C or the scenario data D is set during the big hit game ending process, as shown in FIG. 9-19(B), first, in the first cycle, the same number of times as the time saving control number (50 times or 100 times). When the gaming state is changed to the low base state by executing the variation display of (number of times), in each of the second to thirteenth cycles, of the 128 times of variation display, the 124th variation display is the super reach α. The change pattern is executed.

The timings at which the predetermined cycle fluctuations in each of these cycles are executed are examples when all the fluctuation display results are out of alignment. That is, when the variation display result is a small hit in each cycle, the timing at which the predetermined period variation is executed is deviated by the number of times the variation display result is a small hit.

That is, in the feature part 211SG of the present embodiment, when the big hit game of the big hit A is controlled to a time saving state after the end of the big hit game, if the variation display results are all lost, the 125th or 175th time after the end of the big hit game. If the variation display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and is controlled to the time saving state after the big hit B big hit game ends, if the change display results are all lost, the 174th or 224th time from the end of the big hit game. The variation display for the second time is executed with the variation pattern of super reach α loss.

Further, in the 211SGS245, if the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot (big hit C or jackpot D) (211SGS245; Y), the probability variation flag is set (211SGS262), the time saving flag is set (211SGS263), and the hour/hour counter is set to "0". Is set (211SGS264). Also, the cycle determination counter is cleared (211SGS265).

After executing the processing of 211SGS261 or 211SGS265, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag (211SGS266), and sets the transmission of the big hit end designation command according to the big hit type to be ended (211SGS267). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the set probability variation flag and time saving flag (211SGS268), the game state is in the time saving state (high accurate high base state). Alternatively, the transmission setting of the background image designation command corresponding to the low accuracy/high base state (211SGS269a) and the transmission setting of the scenario data notification command corresponding to the set scenario data are performed (211SGS269b).

Incidentally, these jackpot end designation command, game state designation command, background image designation command, scenario data notification command, for example, after the special symbol process processing is finished, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (211SGS270), and the big hit ending process is ended.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 9-20, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the reception from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored content of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (211SGS271). At this time, if there is no received command (211SGS271; N), the command analysis processing ends.

If there is a received command in 211SGS271 (211SGS271; Y), it is determined whether the received command is the first start mouth winning designation command, for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command (211SGS272). ). Then, when the command is the first start opening winning award designation command (211SGS272; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (211SGS273). For example, in the processing of 211SGS273, if a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 211SG192. Good.

When the received command is not the first start mouth prize designation command in 211 SGS 272 (211 SGS 272; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second start mouth prize designation command (211 SGS 274 ). Then, when the command is the second start opening winning award designation command (211SGS274; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (211SGS275). For example, in the processing of 211SGS275, the command reception control timer may be set to a timer initial value that is predetermined in correspondence with the reception waiting time of the second storage count notification command.

When the received command in 211SGS274 is not the second start opening winning award designation command (211SGS274; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (211SGS276). When the received command is not a symbol designating command in 211SGS276 (211SGS276; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variable category command (211SGS277). When the received command is not a variable category command in 211SGS277 (211SGS277; N), it is determined whether the received command is a cycle determination value notification command (211SGS278). When the received command is not the cycle determination value notification command in 211SGS278 (211SGS278; N), it is determined whether the received command is the first reserved storage number notification command (211SGS279). When it is the first reserved storage number notification command (211SGS279; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer (211SGS280).

When the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command in 211SGS279 (211SGS279; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (211SGS281). Then, when the command is the second reserved storage number notification command (211SGS281; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (211SGS282).

After performing any of the processing of 211SGS280 and 211SGS282, "1" indicating that the pending display mode is undecided is set to the display undecided flag of the stored entry (211SGS283).

If the received command is a symbol designating command in 211SGS276 (211SGS276; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in 211SGS277 (211SGS277; Y), the received command is a cycle determination value notification command in 211SGS278. In the case of (211SGS278; Y) or after executing any of the processing of 211SGS273, 211SGS275, 211SGS283, the received command is stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning command command reception command buffer 211SG194A (211SGS284), which is not shown. Return to processing.

In addition, when the fluctuation start command (the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command) and the pending storage number notification command (the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command) are received, the pending storage The number notification command may not be stored in the start winning award reception command buffer 211SG194A. That is, the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning is only required to be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the start winning time reception command buffer 211SG194A.

When the received command is not the second reserved storage number notification command in 211SGS281 (211SGS281; N), it is determined whether the received command is the scenario data notification command (211SGS285). When the received command is a scenario data notification command in 211SGS285 (211SGS285; Y), the scenario data set by the CPU 103 is specified and stored (211SGS286), and the process returns to 211SGS271. Data corresponding to scenario data A to scenario data D is stored in advance in the RAM 122 of the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, and the effect control CPU 120 performs the following based on the scenario data specified in 211SGS286. It is possible to specify the value set in the cycle determination counter for each cycle.

When the received command is not a scenario data notification command in 211SGS285 (211SGS285; N), it is determined whether the received command is a background image designation command (211SGS287). When the received command in 211SGS287 is the background image designation command (211SGS287; Y), the background image update process (211SGS288) for switching (update) the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is executed to execute the process of 211SGS271. Return to.

If the received command is not a background image designation command in 211SGS287 (211SGS287; N), settings are made according to other received commands (211SGS289), and then the process returns to 211SGS271.

Next, the background image update processing in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-21, in the background image update processing, the effect control CPU 120 first sets the received background image designation command to the high base state background image indicating that the gaming state is the high base state. It is determined whether or not the command is to specify a change (211SGS301). If the command is to specify a change to the high base state background image (211SGS301; Y), the background image in the image display device 5 is updated to the high base state background image, and the background image update processing is terminated (211SGS302). ), if the command is not a command for designating a change to a high base state background image (211SGS301; N), the received background image designation command indicates that the gaming state is a low base state background image. It is determined whether or not there is a command designating a change to (211SGS303).

If the command is to specify a change to the low base state background image (211SGS303; Y), the background image in the image display device 5 is updated to the low base state background image, and the background image update processing ends (211SGS304). ), if the command is not a command for designating a change to the low base state background image (211SGS303; N), the received background image designating command indicates that the background image remaining on the image display device 5 has a loop count value of 2 or more. The value of the cycle determination counter is 6 to 9, that is, the change to the background image before cycle change is designated, which indicates that it is a period in which four fluctuation displays of non-reach loss immediately before the predetermined cycle change are executed. It is determined whether the command is a command to be executed (211SGS305).

If the command is to specify a change to the background image before cycle change (211SGS305; Y), the background image in the image display device 5 is updated to the background image before cycle change, and the background image update processing ends (211SGS306). ), if the command is not a command for designating a change to the background image before cycle change (211SGS305; N), the received background image designating command has a value of the remaining loop number counter of 2 or more and a value of the cycle determination counter is 5). That is, it is determined whether or not the command is a command for designating a change to the background image for periodic fluctuation, which indicates that it is a period (variation) for executing a predetermined cyclic fluctuation (211SGS307).

If the command is to specify a change to the background image for periodic fluctuation (211SGS307; Y), the background image in the image display device 5 is updated to the background image for periodic fluctuation, and the background image update processing ends (211SGS308). When the command is not a command for designating a change to the background image for period fluctuation (211SGS307; N), the received background image designating command has a remaining loop count counter value of 2 or more and a cycle determination counter value of 1 to 4. That is, it is determined whether or not the command is a command for designating a change to the background image after periodic fluctuation, which indicates that it is a period in which four non-reach-losing fluctuation displays are performed immediately after the predetermined cyclic fluctuation (211SGS309). ).

If the command is to specify a change to the background image after periodic fluctuation (211SGS309; Y), the background image in the image display device 5 is updated to the background image after periodic fluctuation, and the background image update processing ends (211SGS310). ), if it is not a command for designating a change to the background image after periodic fluctuation (211SGS309; N), the received background image designating command has a remaining loop count counter value of 1 and a cycle determination counter value of 6-9. That is, that is, whether it is a command for designating a change to the background image before the final cycle change, which indicates that it is a period for executing four times of fluctuation display of non-reach loss immediately before the last predetermined cycle change. Is determined (211SGS311).

If the command is to specify a change to the background image before the final cycle change (211SGS311; Y), the background image in the image display device 5 is updated to the background image before the final cycle change, and the background image update processing ends. (211SGS312), if the command is not a command for designating a change to the background image before the final cycle change (211SGS311; N), the received background image designating command has the value of the remaining loop count counter of 1 and the value of the cycle determination counter. 5, that is, it is determined whether or not the command is a command for designating a change to the background image for the final cycle variation, which indicates that it is a period (variation) for executing the last predetermined cycle variation (211SGS313).

When the command is a command for designating a change to the background image for final cycle variation (211SGS313; Y), the background image in the image display device 5 is updated to the background image for final cycle variation, and the background image update processing ends (211SGS314). ), if it is not a command to specify a change to the background image for the last cycle fluctuation (211SGS313; N), the value of the remaining loop number counter of the received background image specification command is 0, that is, the last predetermined cycle fluctuation. Is already completed and it is determined whether the command is a command for designating a change to the background image after the final cycle change indicating that the predetermined cycle change is not executed until the next time period control is performed (211SGS315).

If the command is to specify the change to the background image after the final cycle change (211SGS315; Y), the background image in the image display phase drop 5 is updated to the background image after the final cycle change, and the background image update processing is finished. (211SGS316), if the command is not a command for designating a change to the background image after the final period variation (211SGS315; N), the background image in the image display device 5 is updated according to other states (211SGS317), and the background image is updated. The update process ends.

Next, an effect control process process in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-22, in the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the prefetching notice setting process (S161), and holds it as the prefetching notice effect in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment. Whether or not to execute the display notice effect is determined. Then, according to the content of the start winning award reception command buffer 211SGS194A, a hold display update process for updating the display mode and the hold display number of the hold display in the first hold storage display area 211SG005D and the second hold storage display area 211SG005U is executed. Then, the processing of S170 to S177 is executed according to the value of the effect control process flag that has been set.

FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the prefetching notice setting process. In the prefetch advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning award reception command buffer 211SG194A (211SGS331), and determines whether or not there is an entry in which the value of the display undecided flag is "1" ( 211 SGS 332). When there is no entry whose display undecided flag has a value of "1" (211SGS332; N), the prefetch advance notice setting process is terminated, and when there is an entry whose display undecided flag has a value of "1" (211SGS332; Y) determines whether or not the gaming state is the high base state (211SGS333). When the gaming state is the high base state (211SGS333; Y), the process proceeds to 211SGS339, and when the gaming state is the low base state (211SGS333; N), the value of the cycle determination value notification command of the entry is specified (211SGS334). ), it is determined whether the specified value is 0 (211SGS335). The value specified by the cycle determination value notification command in 211SGS334 of the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment is the value obtained by subtracting 5 from the value of the cycle determination counter as described above. In other words, the process of 211SGS335 is a process of determining whether or not the entry has a possibility of a predetermined cycle variation (variation display always performed in the variation pattern of super reach α when the variation display result is a loss). is there.

If the specified value is not 0 (211SGS335; N), it is determined whether the specified value in 211SGS334 is any one of 1 to 4, that is, there is a possibility that the variable display is performed four times immediately before the predetermined cycle. It is determined whether or not (211SGS336). When the value specified in 211SGS334 is not any of 1 to 4 (211SGS336; N), the effect control CPU 120 is set to the cycle determination counter next based on the scenario data specified in 211SGS286 of the command analysis processing. Value to be specified (211SGS337). Then, whether or not the difference between the value set next in the cycle determination counter and the value specified in the 211SGS334 is 4 or less, that is, the entry that may be displayed four times immediately after the predetermined cycle is displayed. It is determined whether there is any (211SGS338a). When the difference between the value set in the cycle determination counter and the value specified in 211SGS334 is 5 or more (211SGS338a; N), the cycle is further determined based on the scenario data specified in 211SGS286 of the command analysis processing. (211SGS338b), and it is determined whether the difference between the initial value of the cycle determination counter of the period and the value specified in 211SGS334 is 9 or less (211SGS338c).

It should be noted that whether the difference between the initial value of the cycle determination counter of the cycle and the value specified by the 211SGS334 is 9 or less is determined by the value specified by the 211SGS334 from the actual value of the cycle determination counter. This is because it is a value obtained by subtracting 5. When the difference between the initial value of the cycle determination counter of the cycle and the value specified in the 211SGS334 is 10 or more, that is, the entry is the variable display pending storage executed after the fifth cycle from the predetermined cycle variation. In the case of (211SGS338c), it progresses to 211SGS339.

In 211SGS339, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the symbol designating command of the entry is a big hit (211SGS339). When the symbol designating command of the entry is a big hit (211SGS339; Y), the big hit type is specified from the symbol designating command of the entry (211SGS340), and the display mode of the hold display based on the specified big hit type (holding display) Whether or not to execute the notice effect and the notice type) are determined (211SGS341).

In the 211SGS 341, the presence/absence of execution of the pending display notice effect and the display pattern (previous notice type) are determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. 9-24(A), for example. In the setting example of the determination rate shown in FIG. 9-24(A), the determination rate of the presence or absence of the pending display notice effect and the display pattern (the notice type) is varied according to the jackpot type identified in the processing of 211SGS340.

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as display patterns (notification types) of the pending display notice effect. Of these, when the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 211SG005D or the second hold storage display area 211SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notification type) of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold display is a white star (☆) and the first hold storage display area 211SG005D or the second hold storage display area 211SG005U. Displayed in.

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, the hold display notice effect may not be determined to be non-execution, and the execution of the hold display notice effect is always determined to be the display pattern α or the display pattern (notification type). Either display pattern (announcement type) of the pattern β is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-24(A), when the big hit type is the probability variation big hit (big hit C or big hit D), the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notification type) is displayed. The pattern α is set higher than the determined rate. On the other hand, when the big hit type is the non-probable-variable big hit (big hit A or big hit B), the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (advance notice type) is lower than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. It is set.

With such settings, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (preliminary type), the big hit type is displayed more than when the display pattern α is displayed. The probability of being a probability variation jackpot is increased, and the player's expectation for a probability variation jackpot can be increased.

In the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "big hit", the execution of the hold display notice effect is always determined to display the hold storage display in a white square (◇). Either one of the pattern α and the display pattern β displayed in a white star (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is “big hit”. Even in some cases, a case may be provided in which the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined as in the case where the variable display result is “miss”.

Further, in the 211SGS339, when the symbol designating command of the entry is a loss or a small hit (211SGS339; N), the variation category indicated by the variation category designating command of the newly stored entry is identified (211SGS342). Specifically, it may be specified from the variation category designation command of the entry that the variation pattern is "non-reach", the variation pattern is "super reach", and the variation pattern is "other" including normal reach and small hit. ..

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124, the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 211SG193, or the like, and the variation pattern category specified in the 211SGS343, a misalignment (not shown) is displayed. By referring to the hour hold display notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the hold display notice effect and a display pattern (notice type) when the hold display notice effect is executed (211SGS343).

In the 211SGS 343, for example, the presence/absence of execution of the pending display notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. 9-24(B). In the setting example of the determination rate shown in FIG. 9-24(B), the determination rate of the presence/absence of execution of the hold display notice effect and the determination rate of the display pattern (notice type) are changed according to the variation category specified in the process of 211SGS342. There is.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (preliminary notice types), a display pattern α and a display pattern β, are provided. If the display pattern (preliminary type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending storage display area 211SG005D or the second pending storage display area 211SG005U, When the display pattern (previous notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the pending display is displayed in the first pending storage display area 211SG005D or the second pending storage display area 211SG005U as a white star (*). In addition, when the hold display notice effect is determined to be non-execution, the hold display is displayed in a circular shape (◯) in the first hold storage display area 211SG005D or the second hold storage display area 211SG005U.

As shown in FIG. 9-24(B), when the variation display result is “miss” or “small hit” and the variation pattern category is “other”, the variation display result is “miss”. The rate at which the pending display notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach". When the variation display result is “miss” and the variation pattern category is “super reach”, the variation display result is “miss” or “small hit” and the variation pattern category is “other”. In this case, the ratio of executing the pending display notice effect (the ratio determined other than "no notice effect") is set to be higher than the case.

When the change display result is "Loss" or "Small hit" and the execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, if the change category is "Other", the change pattern category is "non-reach". The display pattern α is set to have a higher rate of determination than in the case of “”. Further, when the category of the variation pattern is “super reach”, the rate of determining the display pattern α is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is “others”. Furthermore, when the execution of the pending display notice effect is determined when the variation display result is “miss”, when the variation pattern category is “other”, the variation pattern category is “non-reach”. The display pattern β is set to have a higher determination rate than that of the display pattern β, and when the variation pattern category is “super reach”, the display pattern β is determined more than when the variation pattern category is “others”. The rate at which β is determined is set high.

When the variation display result is “Loss” or “Small hit”, the pending display notice effect is not executed regardless of whether the variation pattern category is “non-reach”, “other” or “super reach”. Is set to the highest, the pending display notice effect is set to be executed, and the display pattern β is set to the lowest rate.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-24(A) and 9-24(B), when the variable display result is “big hit”, the pending display notice effect is determined to be non-execution (no notice effect). In addition to the above, the rate at which the pending display notice effect is determined to be executed, and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined depends on whether the variation display result is “miss” or “small hit”. The display pattern α or the display pattern β in the pattern category is set higher than the determined rate.

Further, when the variable display result is “miss (non-reach)”, “miss (super reach)”, “miss (other)”, “small hit”, when the execution of the pending display notice effect is decided Is set so that the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit (probable change big hit)”, when execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, the display pattern β is determined and the display pattern α is determined. Set higher than.

With such a setting, when the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (announcement type) of the pending display notice effect, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed). The fluctuation display result is more likely to be a “big hit” than the above. Especially, when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the fluctuation display result is a “big hit” and the big hit type is a sure change big hit. Since the ratio of C and jackpot D increases, the degree of expectation of the player can be increased.

After the execution of the 211SGS343, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the pending display notice effect is determined in the 211SGS343, that is, whether the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α or the display pattern β. It is determined (211SGS344).

After the processing of 211SGS341, or when the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided (211SGS344; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (notice type) is set to the hold indication flag of the entry. (211SGS345). Specifically, if the determined display pattern (advance notice type) is a display pattern α indicating a pending display by "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1" and the determined display pattern (advance notice type) If is a display pattern β indicating a hold display with “☆”, the hold display flag of the entry is set to “2”, and then the process proceeds to 211SGS348.

Further, in the 211SGS336, if the specified value is any one of 1 to 4 (211SGS336; Y), the effect control CPU 120, the entry is a pending storage of a predetermined cycle variation according to the specified value and the number of pending storage. It is determined whether there is any (211SGS345a). For example, when the specified value is 4 and the entry is the fourth reserved storage in the first special figure, the specified value is 3 and the entry is the third reserved storage in the first special figure. In this case, when the specified value is 2 and the entry is the second reserved storage in the first special view, the specified value is 1 and the entry is the first reserved storage in the first special view. As for the case, it is further determined whether or not the cycle determination value notification command already has an entry having the same value as the entry. When there is no entry whose cycle determination value notification command has the same value as the entry, it is determined that the entry is the storage for a predetermined cycle variation. When it is determined that the pending cycle variation of the entry is stored (211SGS345b; Y), the processing proceeds to 211SGS347b.

In the 211SGS338a, when the difference between the value set in the cycle determination value counter next time and the value specified from the cycle determination value notification command is 4 or less (211SGS338a; Y), in the 211SGS338c, the cycle determination counter of the cycle is determined. When the difference between the initial value and the value specified in 211SGS334 is 9 or less (211SGS338c; Y), when 211SGS344 decides not to execute the hold display notice effect (211SGS344; N), in 211SGS345b, the reason cycle of the entry When it is determined that it is not the change pending storage (211SGS345b; N), as the non-execution of the pending display notice effect, "0" indicating white "○" is set to the pending display flag of the entry (211SGS346), Proceed to 211 SGS348.

Further, in the 211SGS335, when the specified value is 0 (211SGS335; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an entry in which the value (“1”) corresponding to the display pattern α is already set in the hold display flag. (211SGS347a). When there is an entry in which the value (“1”) corresponding to the display pattern α is already set in the hold display flag (211SGS347a; Y), it is determined that the hold display flag of the entry is white as the execution of the hold display notice effect is not executed. "0" indicating "○" is set (211SGS346), and the process proceeds to 211SGS348. In addition, when the value corresponding to the display pattern α is not set in the pending display flag in any entry (211SGS347a; N), the value corresponding to the display pattern α in the pending display flag of the entry (“1”) Is set (211SGS347b), and the process proceeds to 211SGS348.

In the 211SGS 348, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display undecided flag of the entry to “0” indicating that the display mode of the hold display has been determined, and ends the prefetch advance notice setting processing.

As described above, by executing the pre-reading notice setting process in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the pending display notice is given for the four variable displays before and after the variable display corresponding to the variable display in which the predetermined period variation may be executed. It is possible to regulate the performance of production.

An example of a case where scenario data A is set will be described with respect to the execution restriction of the hold display notice effect. First, as shown in FIG. 9-25, regarding the high base state after completion of the non-probability variation big hit game (the first cycle in which the variable display is performed 1 to 50 times in FIG. 9-25), the pre-reading notice setting process is performed. As indicated by 211SGS333, the pending display notice effect can be executed regardless of the value of the cycle determination value notification command.

Next, when the gaming state changes to the low base state and the value of the second cycle "79" is set in the cycle determination counter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the cycle determination counter value to 79 to 10. In the period (the period in which the value specified from the cycle determination notification command is 74 to 5), the pending display notice effect can be executed for all the pending displays. However, in the hold display advance notice effect execution restriction period (the period of which the value specified from the cycle determination notification command is 4 to 0 and 127 to 124) in which the value of the cycle determination counter is 9 to 1, the cycle determination value notification command The hold display notice effect is not executed unless the value specified from 0 is 0.

Thereafter, in the third to fourteenth cycles as well, the effect control CPU 120 causes the period determination counter to have a value of 9 to 1 for the pending display notice effect execution restriction period (the value specified from the cycle determination notification command is 4 to 0). And 127 to 124), the hold display advance notice effect is not executed unless the value specified from the cycle determination value notification command is 0.

As shown in FIG. 9-25, after the variation display results are all lost and the final predetermined cycle variation display is completed, after the non-reach loss variation display is executed four times after the last predetermined cycle variation display. After that (variation display after the 1894th time after the non-probability variation big hit game ends), the value of the remaining loop number counter and the value of the cycle determination counter will not change from 0, so the production control CPU 120 pre-reads. In the 211SGS334 of the advance notice setting process, "123" is always specified from the cycle determination value notification command. That is, N (the specified value is not 0) in the processing of 211SG335 of the prefetching notice setting processing, N (the specified value is not 1 to 4) in the processing of 211SG336, N in the processing of 211SGS338a (next cycle determination) Since there is no value set in the cycle counter, the difference between the value set next in the cycle judgment counter and the value specified from the cycle judgment value notification command is 5 or more). After the execution of the non-reach-miss variation display of 4 times, the hold display notice effect can be executed for all the hold displays (there is no execution restriction period of the hold display notice effect).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-26, the image display device 5 displays a background image corresponding to each gaming state, the value of the remaining loop number counter, and the value of the cycle determination counter.

In particular, during the four fluctuations immediately before the predetermined cycle fluctuation, during the predetermined cycle fluctuation, and during the four fluctuations immediately after the predetermined cycle fluctuation, the peripheral road front background image and the cycle fluctuation background image are respectively displayed on the image display device 5. Since the background images after the periodical fluctuation are displayed, the player visually recognizes these background images to be immediately before performing the predetermined periodical fluctuation, that the predetermined periodical fluctuation is being executed, and the predetermined periodical fluctuation has already ended. It is possible to recognize what you have done.

Further, in the 14th cycle (the value of the remaining loop counter is 1), during the four fluctuations immediately before the predetermined cycle fluctuation, during the predetermined cycle fluctuation, and during the four fluctuations immediately after the predetermined cycle fluctuation, Since background images different from the second to thirteenth cycles (background image before final cycle change, background image for final cycle change, background image after last week disappearance change) are displayed, the player visually recognizes these background images. By doing so, it is possible to recognize that a new predetermined cycle fluctuation is not executed unless the fluctuation display result is a big hit (unless the big hit game is finished and the time is shortened).

In addition, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, when the value of the cycle determination counter (cycle determination value) is 1 to 9 (except when the value of the cycle determination counter is 5), the pending display notice is displayed. Although an example is shown in which the performance execution restriction period is set, if the execution display restriction period of the pending display notice effect is not provided, the pending display notification is performed in a period in which the value of the cycle determination counter is 1 to 9. This is because there may be a large difference between the effect mode of the effect and the change pattern of the variable display that is the target of the hold display notice effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-27, when the number of the second pending storages is 0 and the value of the cycle determination counter is 13, when the four pending storages of the first special figure occur, these 4 For each of the reserved memories, the variation category is determined in the winning random number determination process using one of the loss variation pattern determination table A to the loss variation pattern determination table D.

Then, after the variable display being executed is completed, the value of the cycle determination counter is 12 (the value indicated by the cycle determination value notification command) for the variable display based on the first storage of the four storages. Is 7), the value of the cycle determination counter is 11 for the variable display based on the second pending storage (the value indicated by the cycle determination value notification command is 6), and the cycle is displayed for the variable display based on the third pending storage. Based on that the value of the determination counter is 10 (the value indicated by the cycle determination value notification command is 5), the variation pattern is determined by using any one of the variation pattern determination tables A for loss and the variation pattern determination table D for loss. Is determined.

However, for the variation display based on the fourth hold storage, the variation pattern determination table F for loss is used based on that the value of the cycle determination counter is 9 (the value indicated by the cycle determination value notification command is 4). And the variation pattern is determined (the variation pattern is determined by the non-reach PA1-2). That is, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, when the variation category is non-reach in the prefetching notice setting process, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 100% (Fig. 9-24 ( In spite of (see B)), it is possible that the hold display notice effect is executed for non-reach variation by not providing the execution restriction period of the hold display notice effect.

Although the execution restriction period of the pending display notice effect when the value of the cycle determination counter is 6 to 9 has been described above, the reason is the same when the value of the cycle determination counter is 1 to 4. is there.

Further, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the value specified by the effect control CPU 120 from the cycle determination value notification command is 0, the cycle determination value notification command is stored. It is determined that the stored entry is the storage for a predetermined cycle variation, and the display mode of the target display for suspension is displayed in the display pattern α. However, the value specified by the production control CPU 120 from the cycle determination value notification command is 1 Even in the case of ~4, by executing the processing of 211SGS345a, as shown in FIG. 9-28, the pending storage of the predetermined cycle fluctuation is estimated from the value specified from the cycle determination value notification command and the number of pending storages. However, it is possible to display the display mode of the hold display with the display pattern α over a plurality of times of the variable display for the hold storage estimated to have the predetermined period change.

When the reserved display notice effect is executed for the reserved storage that is estimated to be the change in the predetermined cycle, the second special figure reserved storage is newly generated before the variable display based on the reserved storage is started. For example, the pending storage that executes the predetermined cycle fluctuation may be displaced, that is, since it is impossible to prefetch the actual fluctuation pattern accurately, the pending storage that is estimated to be the predetermined cycle fluctuation When the reserved display notice effect is executed for the target, the reserved display based on the reserved memory is set to a display pattern (display pattern α) that does not strongly suggest the variable display result or the degree of expectation.

Further, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, a pre-reading notice setting process is executed as shown in FIG. There may be both a hold display in which an effect cannot be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-29, there are four reserved memories as the first special figure reserved memories, and the first and second reserved memories have the value of the cycle determination counter. 10 (the value indicated by the cycle determination value notification command is 5), which is the pending storage, and the third and fourth pending storages have a cycle determination counter value of 9 (the cycle determination value notification command This is, for example, the case of the pending storage that occurs when the value shown is 4).

In the state shown in FIG. 9-28, as shown in FIG. 9-23, the value specified by the production control CPU 120 from the cycle determination value notification command in the processing of 211SGS336 is the same for the first and second reserved memories. 5 or more (211SGS336; N), the processing after 211SGS338a is executed, that is, the hold display corresponding to the first hold memory or the second hold memory is displayed as the hold display notice effect. It may be displayed with α or display pattern β.

However, for the third and fourth hold storages, based on that the value specified by the effect control CPU 120 from the cycle determination value notification command is any one of 1 to 4 (211SGS336; Y), 211SGS345a, The processing of 211SGS346 is executed unless it is determined (estimated) by the 211SGS345b that the storage is a storage having a predetermined cycle variation, that is, the display of the hold corresponding to the third storage or the fourth storage is displayed as the display effect of the hold display. Is not displayed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β.

Further, even after the end of the predetermined period variation, both a hold display in which the hold display notice effect can be executed and a hold display in which the hold display notice effect cannot be executed may occur in the hold display. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-30, there are four reserved memories as the first special figure reserved memories, and the first and second reserved memories have the value of the cycle determination counter. 70 (the value indicated by the cycle determination value notification command is 75), which is the pending storage, and the third and fourth pending storages have a cycle determination counter value of 69 (the cycle determination value notification command This is, for example, the case of the pending storage that occurs when the value shown is 74).

In the state shown in FIG. 9-30, as shown in FIG. 9-23, with respect to the first and second reserved memories, the value specified by the production control CPU 120 from the cycle determination value notification command in the processing of 211SGS338c is performed. The processing of 211SGS346 is executed based on the fact that the difference between the cycle and the initial value of the cycle determination counter is 9 or less (211SGS338c; N), that is, the first reserved memory or 2 as the reserved display notice effect. The hold display corresponding to the second hold storage is not displayed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β.

However, for the third and fourth hold storages, the difference between the value specified by the effect control CPU 120 from the cycle determination value notification command and the initial value of the cycle determination counter for that cycle is 10 or more (211SGS338c). ; Y), the processing after 211SGS339 is executed, that is, the hold display corresponding to the third hold memory or the fourth hold memory is displayed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β as the hold display notice effect. It may be displayed as.

In addition, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, when a new hold storage occurs during a period in which the hold display notice effect can be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prefetch setting process to hold the newly generated hold. The hold display notice effect can be executed for the hold display according to the memory, but as shown in FIGS. 9-31(A) and 9-31(B), the hold display notice effect can be executed. If the power failure occurs in the state where there is the pending storage that occurred during the period, after the recovery from the power failure, the contents of the start winning award reception command buffer 211SGS194A are not backed up, and these reserved storages are targeted. The pending display notice effect cannot be executed. On the other hand, as for the pending storage generated after the power failure is restored, the symbol designating command, the variation category designating command, the cycle determination value notification command, etc. are stored in each entry in the start winning award reception command buffer 211SGS194A. It is possible to execute a hold display notice effect for a hold storage that occurs after recovery from disconnection.

Next, a display mode of the image display device 5 in the predetermined period variation in the characteristic portion 211SG of the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 9-32. Incidentally, FIG. 9-32 exemplifies a case where the scenario data A is set by the CPU 103 after the jackpot game is over.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-32(A), time saving control is performed over 50 times of variable display. It should be noted that during the time saving control, the value of the first cycle determination counter is decremented each time the variation display ends, but the variation pattern is not determined based on the value of the cycle determination counter. ..

Next, after the time saving state ends, a value (80) corresponding to the second cycle of the scenario data A is set in the cycle determination counter. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-32(B) and FIG. 9-32(C), when the variable display is completed 70 times without the variable display result being a big hit or a small hit, the value of the cycle determination counter becomes Based on this, the variable display of non-reach loss is performed four times.

As shown in 9-32(D), when a start winning corresponding to a predetermined cycle fluctuation occurs while these non-reach-miss variation changes are displayed four times, the start winning is displayed as a pending display notice effect. The original hold display is displayed with the display pattern α.

Then, after the variable display of the non-reach loss is performed four times, the variable display of the super reach α loss is performed as a predetermined cycle variation.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 sets and sets any of the scenario data shown in FIG. 9-18 after the jackpot game of uncertain variation jackpot is finished. A value corresponding to the first cycle of the scenario data is set in the cycle determination counter. Then, the value of the cycle determination counter is decremented by 1 each time the variable display in which the variation display result is a loss is completed, and when the value of the cycle determination counter becomes 5, the super reach α is determined as a predetermined cycle variation. While displaying the variation of the loss, the value corresponding to the next cycle in the set scenario data is set in the cycle determination counter based on the value of the cycle determination counter becoming 0, and the variation display is displayed. Every time the variation display whose result is a loss is finished, the subtraction of the value of the cycle determination counter and the execution of the predetermined cycle variation in response to the value of the cycle determination counter becoming 5 are repeated.

Then, in particular, the value set in the cycle determination counter in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment is different according to the number of times the predetermined cycle variation has been executed so far. Since it is possible to change the timing at which the variation is executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to a monotonous game. As described above, since the variation display according to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation is executed every time the predetermined condition of the present invention is satisfied (the value of the predetermined cycle counter becomes 5), the player is monotonous with respect to the game. It is possible to avoid feeling and to improve the interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-18, the scenario data set after the non-probability variation big hit (big hit A or big hit B) big hit game is different depending on the type (big hit type) of the finished big hit game. .. For this reason, after the big hit game of the big hit A, if all the variation display results are lost, the 125th or 175th variation display after the big hit game is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach α loss. After the jackpot game of B, if the variation display results are all lost, the 174th or 224th variation display after the jackpot game is finished is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach α loss. That is, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the number of fluctuations until the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss is first executed as the predetermined cycle fluctuation differs depending on the jackpot type of the ended jackpot game. , It is possible to avoid monotony of the selection tendency of the variation pattern of super reach α loss and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of fluctuations until the predetermined period fluctuation is carried out is different according to the big hit type of the finished big hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not the one, but the variation pattern of the predetermined cycle variation is changed according to the jackpot type of the jackpot game that has ended (for example, after the jackpot game of jackpot A, if all the variation display results are lost, after the jackpot game From the 125th or the 175th time, a predetermined cycle variation is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach α loss, and after the jackpot B big hit game, if the variation display results are all lost, the 125th or after the jackpot game end In the 175th time, the predetermined cycle fluctuation may be executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-18, after the game of the big hit A, the scenario data A or the scenario data B is set, so that the cycle determination counters are "50", "79", "100", While four values of "128" can be set, after the game of the big hit B is finished, the scenario data C or the scenario data D is set, so "50", "100" is set in the cycle determination counter. , 128 values can be set. That is, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, at least a part of the values set in the cycle determination counter is different depending on the type of jackpot that has ended, so that the number of times of change until the predetermined cycle change is executed is The selection can be easily realized.

In the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, a part of the values that can be set in the cycle determination counter is different after the big hit game of the big hit A and after the big hit game of the big hit B has been exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the big hit game of the big hit A and after the big hit game of the big hit B, all values that can be set in the cycle determination counter may be different. The values that can be set in the cycle determination counter may be the same.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 outputs a cycle determination value notification command corresponding to the value of the cycle determination value counter to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120), so that the effect control is performed. As shown in FIG. 9-23, the CPU 120 can execute the hold display advance notice effect based on the value specified from the received cycle determination value notification command, that is, the number of fluctuations until the predetermined cycle fluctuation starts.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-28, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of 211SGS345a and 211SGS345b to display a hold display based on the hold storage that is estimated to be the hold storage of a predetermined cycle variation. Is displayed in the display pattern α over a plurality of variable displays, the variable display corresponding to the hold display displayed in the display pattern α is executed in the super reach α lost variation pattern. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and improve interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 and 9-14, when none of the values 1 to 128 is set in the cycle determination counter, when the value of the remaining loop number counter is 0, the cycle determination When the value set in the counter is not 1 to 9, the CPU 103 selects the loss variation pattern determination table A to the loss variation pattern determination table D in the variation pattern setting process, and changes the super reach α variation pattern. (PA2-2) can be determined, but as shown in FIG. 9-14, when the value of the cycle determination counter is 6 to 9, that is, before 1 to 4 fluctuations of the predetermined cycle fluctuation, the fluctuation display result is If there is a loss, the variation pattern determination table F for the loss is uniquely determined to determine the variation pattern of the non-reach loss (PA1-2). Therefore, the variation pattern of the super reach α loss in the variation immediately before the predetermined cycle variation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variable display, which is the target of the presentation mode of the hold display notice effect, from becoming unclear and the interest of the hold display notice effect to be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-14, when the CPU 103 determines that the time saving flag is set in the processing of the variation pattern setting processing 211SGS181, that is, the number of times the time saving control is executed at the end of the jackpot game. When the same number as “50” or “100” is set as the initial value of the cycle determination counter, the value of the cycle determination counter corresponds to 5 by selecting the loss variation pattern determination table D. However, if "79", "128", etc. are set as the initial values in the cycle determination counter while the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2) is not uniquely determined, If the value is 5, the variation pattern determination table E for loss is uniquely determined to determine the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α loss. Therefore, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the value of the cycle determination counter is commonly set when the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state) and the normal state (low base state). At the same time, since the variation display of the super reach α loss as the predetermined period variation can be executed only in the low base state, it is possible to easily realize the tendency of selecting the variation pattern that matches the gaming state.

Although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the predetermined cycle fluctuation is not executed in the high base state, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the cycle determination counter is also maintained in the high base state. The predetermined cycle variation may be executed based on the fact that the value becomes 5.

When the predetermined cycle variation can be executed even in the high base state as described above, a value different from the number of time saving control in the cycle determination counter in the high base state (for example, different from “50” or “100”). By setting "30", "80", etc.), the predetermined cycle fluctuation may be executed in fluctuations other than the final fluctuation in the high base state. When performing the predetermined cycle variation in the high base state as described above, the predetermined cycle variation is executed with a reach loss variation pattern different from that in the low base state (for example, a variation pattern of super reach β loss or normal reach loss). May be. Further, when a predetermined cycle variation is executed in the high base state, an initial value corresponding to the number of final variations of the high base state is set in the cycle determination counter (for example, in the case of the feature section 211SG of the present embodiment, By setting "54" or "104" corresponding to the 50th or 100th variation display in the high base state), the final variation in the high base state may be executed by a dedicated variation pattern. By doing so, it is possible to preferably execute the effect of displaying the number of prize balls obtained by the number of consecutive games on the image display device 5 in the final variation of the high base state.

In addition, the CPU 103 executes a starting mouth winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, a reserved storage number notification command, a cycle determination value notification command, etc. by executing the winning random number determination processing shown in FIG. 9-11. It is possible to output to the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120), and the production control CPU 120, in the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 9-23, the value specified from the cycle determination value notification command or the symbol designating command. From the variation display result indicated by, the variation display category indicated by the variation category designation command can appropriately execute the pending display notice effect.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the transmission setting of the reserved storage number notification command in the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 9-10, and the symbol designation command and the variation category designation command in the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 9-11. By executing the transmission setting and executing the command control process shown in FIG. 4, the commands for which these transmission settings have been performed are output to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). In the pre-reading notice setting process of 9-23, the hold display notice effect can be executed based on the number of hold memories specified from these received commands, the variation category, and the value of the cycle determination value notification command. Particularly, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, by executing 211SGS345a, 211SGS345b, and 211SGS347, it is possible to infer the pending storage of a predetermined cycle variation from the value of the number of pending storages or the cycle determination value notification command, and based on the estimation. It is possible to execute the pending display notice effect.

Further, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-12(B), when the start winning is generated a plurality of times during the variable display of 1, when the CPU 103 wins based on each starting winning. Since the cycle determination value notification command indicating the same value is output to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) by executing the random value determination process, the effect control CPU 120 executes/non-executes the hold display advance notice effect. By referring to the cycle determination value notification command indicating the same value when determining, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate pending display notice effect from being executed.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the same value (“50” or “100”) as the number of fluctuations in which the time saving control is carried out in the cycle determination counter after the end of the big hit game of the non-probable variation big hit, and the CPU 103 sets it to FIG. As shown, each time the variable display ends, the value of the cycle determination counter is decremented by -1, and a cycle determination notification command corresponding to the value is given to the cycle determination counter after the subtraction, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the remaining shortened time count from the cycle determination notification command without separately providing a command by which the effect control CPU 120 can specify the remaining shortened time count.

Further, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the background image update processing shown in FIGS. 9-21, whereby the gaming state is the high base state and the gaming state is the low base state. It is easy for the player to say that, 4 fluctuations immediately before the predetermined cycle fluctuation are being executed, that the predetermined cycle fluctuation is being executed, that the 4 fluctuations that are immediately after the predetermined cycle fluctuation are being executed, etc. Can be recognized.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Be done.

For example, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine 1, if the variation pattern is determined only by lottery based on each variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of non-reach-miss may continue to be selected due to the bias of probability or the like. In such a case, the reach effect or the like of the super reach is not executed for a long time, which is a factor of deteriorating the interest of the game. Therefore, in the characteristic part 211SG of the above-described embodiment, by using the scenario data as shown in FIG. 9-18, the variation display is executed with the variation pattern of the super reach α loss for each predetermined variation. However, in this case, since it is necessary to store in advance the data for each scenario data over a long period of time (up to 1894 fluctuation depending on the scenario data as shown in FIG. It is possible to put pressure on the memory capacity of.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-33 as a modified example 211SG-1, at the end timing of the big hit game, the number of fluctuations in each cycle is determined by lottery from a plurality of the number of fluctuations stored in advance, and scenario data is obtained. It may be created.

When the number of fluctuations in each cycle is determined by lottery in this way, for example, the number of fluctuations in each cycle may be determined at a different rate for each jackpot type of the completed jackpot game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-33(B), when the big hit type is the big hit A, the number of fluctuations in each cycle is 50 times at a rate of 50%, 79 times at a rate of 30%, and 20 times. When the jackpot type is the jackpot B, the number of fluctuations in each cycle is 50% at a rate of 10%, 79 times at a rate of 40%, and 128 at a rate of 50%. Decide on times. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to specify the number of fluctuations in each cycle, so that it becomes possible for the player to pay more attention to the execution of the predetermined cycle fluctuation in each cycle. The interest can be improved.

Further, in the present modification example 211SG-1, a mode in which the number of fluctuations in all cycles from the first cycle to the 14th cycle is determined by lottery is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and fluctuations are possible. The period for determining the number of times may be only a part.

Further, in the characteristic part 211SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a mode in which execution of the hold display notice effect is restricted based on the value specified from the cycle determination value notification command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is displaying the background image before cycle change or the background image after cycle change as the background image, or the received background image designation command is for before cycle change. Execution of the pending display notice effect may be restricted based on a command for designating a change to the background image or a command for designating a change to the background image after periodic fluctuation.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-mentioned embodiment, the set value can be set in a plurality of stages, and a pachinko gaming machine having a different degree of advantage for the player depending on the set value is exemplified, and In the characteristic portion 211SG, the pachinko gaming machine that executes the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach α loss for each predetermined cycle has been exemplified, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention has the characteristic portion 207SG and the characteristic portion 211SG. Both may be possible.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of performing both the characteristic portion 207SG and the characteristic portion 211SG in this way, for example, the variation of the super reach α loss as the predetermined period variation and the variation of the super reach α loss which is not the predetermined period variation. With, it is possible to execute the set value suggesting effect that suggests the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the variation of the super reach α loss as the predetermined cycle variation and the variation of the super reach α loss not the predetermined cycle variation. The execution rate of the set value suggestive effect may be different (for example, the execution rate of the set value suggestive effect during the fluctuation of the super reach α loss as the predetermined cycle fluctuation is not the predetermined cycle fluctuation. Higher than the execution rate of the set value suggestive effect during fluctuation of the set value, or the execution rate of the set value suggestive effect during fluctuation of the super reach α loss that is not the predetermined cycle fluctuation It is higher than the execution rate of the set value suggestive effect during fluctuation).

Further, when the set value suggesting effect can be executed in the change of the super reach α loss as the predetermined cycle variation, the execution ratio of the set value suggesting effect in the change of the super reach α loss as the predetermined cycle variation of each cycle is different. (For example, the execution ratio of the set value suggestive effect during the variation of the super reach α loss as the predetermined cycle variation of the 14th cycle is more than the variation of the super reach α loss as the predetermined cycle variation of the first cycle. Which is higher than the execution rate of the set value suggestive effect in the above, the execution rate of the set value suggestive effect during the variation of the super reach α loss as the predetermined cycle variation of the first cycle is the super ratio as the predetermined cycle variation of the 14th cycle. Higher than the execution rate of the set value suggestive effect during the variation of reach α loss, the highest execution rate of the set value suggestive effect during the variation of super reach α loss as the predetermined cycle variation of the 7th cycle The execution ratio of the set value suggestive effect is the lowest during the change of the super reach α loss as the predetermined cycle change of the 14th cycle).

Further, in the characteristic part 211SG of the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the effect control CPU 120 can specify the number of remaining time saving control by the CPU 103 outputting the cycle determination notification command, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the effect control CPU 120 determines the remaining time saving control count for the player by the display on the image display device 5 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the value specified from the cycle determination value notification command. You may notify.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Performance display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns;
Variable display means capable of performing variable display according to the determined variable display pattern,
Wherein with the advantageous state can be controlled to an advantageous specific state for the player after the A in organic interest state different state ends, a controllable state control means to the non-specific state after completion of the specific state,
Wherein the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific state by the execution count of the variable display in a particular state, a second predetermined condition and a including a plurality of predetermined to establish the non-specific state by the execution count of the variable display in the non-specific state Condition determining means capable of determining that any one of the conditions is satisfied,
Equipped with
The second predetermined condition includes a plurality of types of second predetermined conditions in which the number of executions of variable display in the non-specific state is different,
At least a part of the plurality of types of second predetermined conditions can be periodically satisfied,
The variable display pattern determining means, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible determine a particular variable display pattern,
It is possible to satisfy the second predetermined condition of a different type according to the number of times the predetermined condition has been satisfied after being controlled to the specific state.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images